CA2466870A1 - Methods for treating autoimmune disorders, and reagents related thereto - Google Patents
Methods for treating autoimmune disorders, and reagents related thereto Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- CA2466870A1 CA2466870A1 CA002466870A CA2466870A CA2466870A1 CA 2466870 A1 CA2466870 A1 CA 2466870A1 CA 002466870 A CA002466870 A CA 002466870A CA 2466870 A CA2466870 A CA 2466870A CA 2466870 A1 CA2466870 A1 CA 2466870A1
- Authority
- CA
- Canada
- Prior art keywords
- alkyl
- alkenyl
- alkynyl
- hydrogen
- peptide
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
Classifications
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
- A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
- A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
- A61K31/40—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
- A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
- A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
- A61K31/40—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil
- A61K31/401—Proline; Derivatives thereof, e.g. captopril
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
- A61K31/69—Boron compounds
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
- A61K38/005—Enzyme inhibitors
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
- A61P1/04—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for ulcers, gastritis or reflux esophagitis, e.g. antacids, inhibitors of acid secretion, mucosal protectants
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
- A61P1/18—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for pancreatic disorders, e.g. pancreatic enzymes
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
- A61P13/12—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of the kidneys
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
- A61P19/02—Drugs for skeletal disorders for joint disorders, e.g. arthritis, arthrosis
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
- A61P19/04—Drugs for skeletal disorders for non-specific disorders of the connective tissue
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P21/00—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
- A61P21/04—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system for myasthenia gravis
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
- A61P3/08—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
- A61P3/10—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
- A61P31/12—Antivirals
- A61P31/14—Antivirals for RNA viruses
- A61P31/18—Antivirals for RNA viruses for HIV
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
- A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
- A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
- A61P37/06—Immunosuppressants, e.g. drugs for graft rejection
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
- A61P37/08—Antiallergic agents
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P5/00—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system
- A61P5/14—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system of the thyroid hormones, e.g. T3, T4
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P7/00—Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
Landscapes
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
- General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- Immunology (AREA)
- Epidemiology (AREA)
- Diabetes (AREA)
- Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
- Rheumatology (AREA)
- Biomedical Technology (AREA)
- Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
- Virology (AREA)
- Endocrinology (AREA)
- Orthopedic Medicine & Surgery (AREA)
- Hematology (AREA)
- Neurology (AREA)
- Molecular Biology (AREA)
- Emergency Medicine (AREA)
- Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
- Communicable Diseases (AREA)
- Transplantation (AREA)
- Obesity (AREA)
- Neurosurgery (AREA)
- Pulmonology (AREA)
- Tropical Medicine & Parasitology (AREA)
- AIDS & HIV (AREA)
- Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
- Oncology (AREA)
- Dermatology (AREA)
Abstract
The invention generally relates to improved methods for treatment or prophylaxis in animal subjects (including humans) of autoimmune disorders including Type 1 diabetes, septic shock, multiple sclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease (IBD) and Crohn's disease.
Description
Methods fof~ Tf~eatiszg Autoimmuhe Disofdef~s, a~cd Reagents Related Thereto Funding Worlc described herein was supported by funding from the National Institutes of Health. The United States Govermnent has certain rights in the invention.
Background of the Invention The immune system can normally distinguish "self' from "non-self'. Some immune system cells (lymphocytes) become sensitized against "self' tissue cells, but are normally controlled by other lymphocytes. When the normal control process is disrupted, allowing lymphocytes to avoid suppression, or when there is an alteration in some body tissue so that it is no longer recognized by the immune system as "self', autoimmune disorders develop. The mechanisms that cause disrupted control or tissue alterations are not well known. One theory holds that various microorganisms and drugs may trigger some of these changes, particularly in people with genetic predisposition to autoimmune disorders. There are a number of autoimmune diseases including, for example, multiple sclerosis (MS), rheumatoid arthritis (RA), and Type I diabetes.
Type I diabetes is a progressive autoimmune disease, in which the beta cells that produce insulin are slowly destroyed by the body's own immune system.
White blood cells called T lymphocytes produce immune factors called cytol~ines that attack and gradually destroy the beta cells of the pancreas. Important cytol~ines are interleul~in-1-beta, tmnor necrosis factor-alpha, and interferon-gamma.
Specific proteins are also critical in the process. They include glutamic acid decarboxylase (GAD), insulin, and islet cell antigens. These proteins serve as autoantigens.
That is, they trigger the self attaclc of the immune system on its body's own beta cells. It is unknown what first starts this cascade of immune events, but evidence suggests that both a genetic predisposition and environmental factors, such as a viral infection, are involved.
As a result of autoimmune diabetes, the pancreas produces little or no insulin, and insulin must be injected daily for the survival of the diabetic. Insulin, a hormone produced by the pancreas, is needed to convert sugar, starches and other food into glucose and to make it available to the body's cells for energy. In muscle, adipose (fat) and connective tissues, insulin facilitates the entry of glucose into the cells by an action on the cell membranes. The ingested glucose is normally converted in the liver to C02 and H20 (50%); to glycogen (5%); and to fat (30-40%), the latter being stored in fat depots. Fatty acids from the adipose tissues are circulated, returned to the liver for re-synthesis of triacylglycerol and metabolized to lcetone bodies for utilization by the tissues. The fatty acids are also metabolized by other organs. Fat formation is a major pathway for carbohydrate utilization. The net effect of insulin is to promote the storage and use of carbohydrates, protein and fat.
Some complications arising from long-standing diabetes are vascular disease, microvascular disease, eye complications, diabetic nephropathy, diabetic neuropathy, diabetic foot problems, and slcin and mucous membrane problems. The action of Type 1 diabetes is to cause hyperglycemia (elevated blood glucose concentration) and a tendency towards diabetic lcetoacidosis (DIVA). Currently treatment requires chronic administration of insulin. Sporadic or persistent incidence of hyperglycemia can be controlled by administering insulin. Uncontrolled hyperglycemia can further damage the cells of the pancreas which produce insulin (the (3-islet cells) and in the long term create greater insulin deficiencies.
Type 1 diabetes (Insulin dependent diabetes mellitus, IDDM) represents 20%
of all human diabetes, and is the most serious form of the disease, with highest morbidity an mortality. Up to 800,000 people in the US are estimated to have type 1 diabetes, with about 30,000 new cases diagnosed each year. In addition., the incidence of IDDM has been rising over the past few decades in certain regions of the US
and some European countries, particularly in Finland and England.
_2_ Currently, oral sulfonylureas and insulin injections are the only two therapeutic agents available in the United States for treatment of Diabetes mellitus.
Both agents have the potential for producing hypoglycemia as a side effect, reducing the blood glucose concentration to dangerous levels. There is no generally applicable and consistently effective means of maintaining an essentially normal fluctuation in glucose levels in DM. The resultant treatment attempts to minimize the risks of hypoglycemia while keeping the glucose levels below a target value. The drug regimen is combined with control of dietary intake of carbohydrates to keep glucose levels in control. However, to date, there has been no cure for many autoimmune disorders, including type 1 diabetes. Clearly, a strong need exists for new, more effective treatments for these diseases.
Summary of the Invention The invention generally relates to improved methods for treatment or prophylaxis in animal subjects (including hu~.nans) of autoimmune disorders including Type I diabetes, septic shock, multiple sclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease (IBD) and Crohn's disease.
One aspect of the invention relates to a method for treating a marmnal having an autoimmune disease, such as Type I diabetes, septic shock, multiple sclerosis, IBD, or Crohn's disease, comprising administering to the mammal a dipeptidylpeptidase IV
(DPIV) inhibitor, wherein administering the inhibitor induces immunosuppression and modulates the pharmacolcinetics of polypeptide hormones required for tissue regeneration.
Brief Description of the Drawings Figure 1 is a diagrammatic representation of the synthesis of a boro-Pro compound.
Figure 2 is a diagrammatic representation of the synthesis of a Cyclohexylglycine -bozo-Ala.
Figure 3 is a time course of inactivation curve of Cyclohexylglycine-boro-Ala at pH 8.
Figure 4 is a bar graph illustrating DPPIV enzyme activity as measured from rat serum samples before and 1 hour after administration of Cyclohexylglycine-boro-Ala.
Figure 5 is a time course of incidence of Type 1 diabetes in NOD mice upon administration of Val-boro-Pro, or Cyclohexylglycine-boro-Ala, as compared to control.
Figure 6 is a bar graph illustrating the incidence of Type 1 diabetes in NOD
mice upon administration of Val-boro-Pro or Cyclohexylglycine-born-Ala, as compared to control at 120 days after start of treatment.
Detailed Description of the Invention i. Overview of the Inve~ctioh The present invention provides methods and compositions generally to prevent, reduce, or eliminate autoimmune disorders, such as Type 1 diabetes, septic shoclc, multiple sclerosis, IBD or Crohn's disease in animals. As described in greater detail below, the subject method includes the administration, to an animal, of a composition including one or more dipeptidylpeptidase inhibitors, especially inhibitors of the dipeptidylpeptidase IV (DPIV) enzyme or other enzyme of similar specificity, in an amount which modulates the pharmacol~inetics of polypeptide hormones in a manner that produces tissue regeneration (e.g., such as may be manifest in an increase in tissue mass). While not being bound by any particular theory, it may be useful to deliver an amount of DPIV inhibitor sufficient to suppress an autoimmune component of the disease (such as a reduce a cellular and/or humoral response against the target tissue). Other immunosuppressive agents can be administered conjointly.
For instance, in certain embodiments the method involves administration of a DPIV inhibitor, preferably at a predetermined times) during a 24-hour period, in an aanount effective to improve one or more aberrant indices associated with Type diabetes, septic shock, multiple sclerosis, IBD or Crohn's disease.
The present invention provides methods and compositions for regeneration of tissues damaged or destroyed as a result of autoimmune diseases by altering the half life of a variety of different polypeptide hormones through inhibiting the proteolysis of one or more peptide hormones by DPIV or some other proteolytic activity.
The subject method can be used to increase the half life of proglucagon-derived peptides including glucagon, glucagon-lilce peptide-1 (GLP-1), glucagon-like peptide-2 (GLP-2, PG 126-158), glicentin (corresponding to PG 1-69), oxyntomodulin (PG 33-69), glicentin-related pancreatic polypeptide (GRPP, PG 1-30), intervening peptide-2 (IP-2, PG 111-122amide), glucose-dependent insulinotropic peptides, vasoactive intestinal polypeptide (VIP), vasostatin I
and II, peptide histidine methionine (PHM), peptide histidine isoleucine (PHI), secretin, gastric inhibitory peptide, gastrin-releasing peptide (GRP), growth hormone-releasing hormone (GHRH), helospectin, helodermin, pituitary adenylate cyclase-activating peptide (PACAP, PACAP 27, and PACAP 38), and PACAP-related peptide (PRP), as well as calcitonin and secretin.
For instance, autoimmune (Type 1) diabetes leads to apoptotic destruction of [3-pancreatic islets responsible for insulin secretion. Polypeptide hormones, such as exendin-4, an analog of glucagon-like peptide 1 (GLP-1), have been shown to stimulate the regeneration of the pancreas and expansion of (3-cells mass by processes of both neogenesis and proliferation of [3-cells. Support for [3-cell neogenesis being a direct effect of the exendin-4 comes from the finding that duct cells expressed GLP-1 receptor, both at the mRNA and protein levels. (Xu et. al. (1999) Diabetes 48:2270-2276). Thus, modulation of plasma half life of GLP-1 and analogs thexeof hold promise in a novel therapy to stimulate (3-cell growth, and differentiation when administered to diabetic individuals with reduced (3-cell mass.
In addition, GLP-1 and the longer acting GLP-1 agonist exendin-4 stimulate the expression of the IDX-1 homeodomain protein in the pancreas when administered to mice. Expression of both immunoreactive IDX-1 and (3-galactosidase expressed from Lac2 reporter transgene driven by the IDX-1 promoter occurs in the pancreatic ducts and the exocrine pancreas. It is also known that IDX-1 is required for the growth of the pancreas and that the epithelium of the pancreatic ducts and the centrolobular terminal ducts in the acinar tissue are the source of the differentiation of new (3-cells ((3-cell neogenesis). (Stoffers et al (2000) Diabetes 49:741-748). Thus, modulation of plasma half life of GLP-1 and analogs thereof similarly hold promise in a novel therapy to stimulate [3-cell neogenesis.
Furthermore, the activation of inducible nitric oxide synthase (iNOS) by inflammatory cytolcines is considered a mediator of destruction in (3-cells.
Recent findings showed that the neuropeptide pituitary adenyl cyclase-activating polypeptide (PACAP), whose distribution was identified in pancreatic neurons, inhibited nitric oxide (NO) production in cytokine-activated macrophages. (Selciya (2000) Biochem Biophys Res Comm (2000) 278(1):211-216) Therefore, modulation of half life of PACAP and analogs thereof may be useful in treatment of Type 1 diabetes.
GLP-2, for example, has been identified as a factor responsible for inducing proliferation of intestinal epithelium. See, for example, Druclcer et al.
(1996) PNAS
93:7911. The subject method can be used as part of a regimen for treating injury, inflammation, or resection of intestinal tissue, e.g., where enhanced growth and repair of the intestinal mucosal epithelial is desired. Thus modulation of half life of GPL-2 and analogs thereof hold promise for the treatment of gut-related autoimmune diseases, such as, for example, inflammatory bowel disease (IBD).
Rheumatoid arthritis (RA) is a chronic and debilitating autoimmune disease of unknown ethiology, characterized by chronic inflammation in the joints and subsequent destruction of the cartilage and bone. Neuropeptide vasoactive intestinal peptide (VIP) has been shown to significantly reduce incidence and severity of arthritis, completely abrogating joint swelling and destruction of cartilage and bode.
(Delgado (2001) Nat Med 7(5) 563-568) Consequently modulation of half life of VIP
and analogs thereof holds promise for the treatment of rheumatoid arthritis.
In addition, VIP itself as well as more stable VIP derived agents, have been used or proposed as efficient therapeutic treatments of several autoimmune disorders, such as septic shock, multiple sclerosis, Crohn's disease, and autoimmune diabetes.
(Gomariz (2001) Curr Pharm Des 7(2):89-111) Additionally, the subject method can be used to alter the pharmacol~inetics of Peptide YY (PYY) and neuropeptide Y (NPY), both members of the pancreatic polypeptide family, as DPIV has been implicated in the processing of those peptides in a manner which alters receptor selectivity.
DPIV has also been implicated in the metabolism and inactivation of growth hormone-releasing factor (GHRF). GHRF is a member of the family of homologous peptides that includes glucagon, secretin, vasoactive intestinal peptide (VIP), peptide histidine isoleucine (PHI), pituitary adenylate cyclase activating peptide (PACAP), gastric inhibitory .peptide (GIP) and helodermin. I~ubialc et al. (1994) Peptide Res 7:153. GHRF is secreted by the hypothalamus, and stimulates the release of growth hormone (GH) from the anterior pituitary. Thus, the subject method can be used to improve clinical therapy for certain growth hormone deficient children, and in clinical therapy of adults to improve nutrition and to alter body composition (muscle vs. fat).
The subject method can also be used in veterinary practice, for example, to develop higher yield mills production and higher yield, leaner livestoclc.
Additional other autoimmune diseases and conditions that may be treated with the methods of the present invention are: systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE), ixmnunovasculitis, myasthenia gravis, acute immunological arthritis, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, Grave's disease, rheumatoid synovitis, hereditary angioedema, hyperacute allograft rejection, xenograft rejection, infectious disease and sepsis, endotoxemia, scleroderma, glomerulonephritis, HIV infection, multiple sclerosis, atrophic gastritis, pancreatitis, allergic encephalomyelitis, thyroxicosis, sympathetic ophthalmia, allergic reactions, multiple organ failure, allergic reactions, bullous diseases, urticaria, cryoglobulinemia, renal cortical necrosis, transplant organ reperfusion, post-ischemic reperfusion conditions, lupus nephritis, Crohn's disease, dermatomyositis, proliferative nephritis, type II collagen-induced arthritis, Bahcet's syndrome, Sjogren's syndrome, thermal injury, preeclampsia, thyroiditis, acute gouty arthritis, primary biliary cirrhosis inflammation, cranial nerve damage in meningitis, renal ischemia, anaphylaxis, and bowel inflannnation.
In general, the inhibitors of the subject method will be small molecules, e.g., with molecular weights less than 7500 amu, preferably less than 5000 amu, and even more preferably less than 2000 amu and even 1000 amu. In preferred embodiments, the inhibitors will be orally active.
In preferred embodiments, a DPIV inhibitor of the present invention has a Iii for DPIV inhibition of 1.0 nM or less, more preferably of 0.1 nM or less, and even more preferably of 0.01 nM or less. Indeed, inhibitors with Ki values in the picomolar and even femtamolar range are contemplated.
Preferably, the compounds utilized in the subject method will have an EC50 for the desired biological effect, such as for example, increase in the plasma half life of a peptide hormone that promotes tissue regeneration in the micromolar or less range more preferably in the nanomolar or less range and even more preferably in the picomolar or femtomolar range.
In certain embodiments, the subject inhibitors are peptidyl compounds (including peptidomimetics) which are optimized, e.g., generally by selection of the Ca, substituents, for the substrate specificity of the targeted proteolytic activity. These peptidyl compounds will include a functional group, such as in place of the scissile peptide bond, which facilitates inhibition of a serine-, cysteine- or aspartate-type protease, as appropriate. For example, the inhibitor can be a peptidyl oc-dilcetone or a peptidyl a,-l~eto ester, a peptide haloall~ylketone, a peptide sulfonyl fluoride, a peptidyl boronate, a peptide epoxide, a peptidyl diazomethanes, a peptidyl phosphonate, isocoumaxins, benzoxazin-4-ones, carbamates, isocyantes, isatoic anhydrides or the lilce. Such functional groups have bee provided in other protease _g_ inhibitors, and general routes for their synthesis are known. See, for example, Angelastro et al., J. Med Chem. 33:11-13 (1990); Bey et al., EPO 363,284; Bey et al., EPO 364,344; Grubb et al., WO 88/10266; Higuchi et al., EPO 393,457; Ewoldt et al., Molecular Immunolo~y 29(6):713-721 (1992); Hernandez et al., Journal of Medicinal Chemistry 35(6): 1121-1129 (1992); Vlasalc et al., J Virolo~y 63(5):2056-2062 (1989); Hudig et al., J Immunol 147(4):1360-136 (1991); Odalcc et al., Biochemistry 30(8):2217-2227 (1991); Vijayalalcshmi et al., Biochemistry 30(8):2175-2183 (1991);
Kam et al. , Thrombosis and Haemostasis 64(1):133-137 (1990); Powers et al., J
Cell Biochem 39(1):33-46 (1989); Powers et al., Proteinase Inhibitors, Barren et al., Eds., Elsevier, pp. 55-152 (1986); Powers et al., Biochemistry 29(12):3108-3118 (1990);
Oweida et al., Thrombosis Research 58(2):391-397 (1990); Hudig et al., Molecular Immunolo~y 26(8):793-798 (1989); Orlowski et al., Archives of Biochemistry and Biophysics 269(1):125-136 (1989); zL1111n0 et al., Biochimica et Biophysica Acta.
967(3):331-340 (1988); Kam et al., Biochemistry 27(7):2547-2557 (1988);
Parlces et al., Biochem J. 230:509-516 (1985); Green et al., J. Biol. Chem. 256:1923-1928 (1981); Angliker et al., Biochem. J. 241:871-875 (1987); Puri et al., Arch.
Biochem.
Biophys. 27:346-358 (1989); Hanada et al., Proteinase Inhibitors: Medical and Biological Aspects, Katunuma et al., Eds., Springer-Verlag pp. 25-36 (1983);
Kajiwara et al., Biochem. Int. 15:935-944 (1987); Rao et al., Thromb. Res.
47:635-637 (1987); Tsujinaka et al., Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 153:1201-1208 (1988)). See also U.S. Patents Bachovchin et al. 4,935,493; Bachovchin et al.
5,462,928; Powers et al. 5,543,396; Hanlco et al. 5,296,604; and the PCT
publication of Ferring PCT/GB94/02615.
In other embodiments, the inhibitor is a non-peptidyl compound, e.g., which can be identified by such drug screening assays as described herein. These inhibitors can be, merely to, illustrate, synthetic organic compounds, natural products, nucleic acids or carbohydrates.
A representative class of compounds for use in the method of the present invention are represented by the general formula (as described in the PCT
application No. PCT/LTS99/02294, which is incorporated herein by reference):
AJ
~\W
wherein A represents a 4-8-membered heterocycle including the N and the Ca, carbon;
Z represents C or N; , W represents a functional group which reacts with an active site residue of the targeted protease, as for example, -CN, -CH=NRS, -p-X1 ' O /Y i 5o O
-p-X1 ~ B~Y ~ i R52 or Rl represents a C-terminally linlced amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C- terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group, or o S o or -S-R6 ;
Rs Re O
R2 is absent or represents one or more substitutions to the ring A, each of which can independently be a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower allcenyl, a lower alleynyl, a carbonyl (such as a carboxyl, an ester, a fonnate, or a lcetone), a thiocarbonyl (such as a thioester, a thioacetate, or a thioformate), an amino, an acylamino, an amide, a cyano, a vitro, an azido, a sulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfonamide, -(CH~)"i R7, -(CH~)m OH, -(CH2)m O-lower allcyl, -(CH~)m O-lower allcenyl, -(CH2)ri O-(CH2),n R7, -(CH~)m SH, -(CH2)m S-lower alkyl, -(CH2),n S-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)ri S-(CH2)m R7;
if X is N, R3 represents hydrogen, if X is C, R3 represents hydrogen or a halogen, a lower allcyl, a lower allcenyl, a lower allcynyl, a carbonyl (such as a carboxyl, an ester, a formate, or a lcetone), a thiocaxbonyl (such as a thioester, a thioacetate, or a thioformate), an amino, an acylamino, an amido, a cyano, a vitro, an azido, a sulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfonamido, -(CH2)m R7, -(CH2)m OH, -(CH2),n O-lower allcyl, -(CH2)m O-lower allcenyl, -(CH~)ri O-(CH~)lr; R7, -(CH2)1ri SH, -(CH~)m S-lower allcyl, -(CH2)m S-lower allcenyl, -(CH~)ri S-(CH~)m R7;
RS represents H, an allcyl, an allcenyl, an allcynyl, -C(Xl)(X2)X3, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH~)n-OH, -(CH~)n-O-alkyl, -(CH~)n-O-alkenyl, -(CH~)n-O-allcynyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH~)m-R7, -(CH~)n-SH, -(CHZ)n-S-alkyl, -(CH2)n-S-allcenyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7, -C(O)C(O)NH2, -C(O)C(O)OR'7;
Rg represents hydrogen, a halogen, a allcyl, a alkenyl, a alkynyl, an aryl, -(CH~)m R7, -(CH2)m OH, -(CH~)~; O-alkyl, -(CH~)m O-allcenyl, -(CH~)m O-allcynyl, -(CH~)~ O-(CH2)m R7, -(CH2)m SH, -(CH2)1ri S-alkyl, -(CH2)m S-allcenyl, -(CH2)ln S-allcynyl, -(CH2)mS-(CH2)~; R7, ~R$ ~ ~R$ NH2 -(CH2)m-N~ ~ -(CH2)n-C-N~ ' II
R9 R9 -(CH2)n'NHp-C-NH2 (CH2)n-C-O-R7 -(CH2)n-C-alkyl -(CH2)n'-'IC-alkenyl O O
or I I
-(CH2)n-C-alkynyi ~ -(CH2)n-C-yCH2)m-R7 R7 represents, independently for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, arallcyl, cycloalkyl, cycloallcenyl, or heterocycle;
R'7 represents, independently for each occurrence, hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, allcenyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloallcyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
Y1 and Y~ can, independently , be OH, or a group capable of being hydrolyzed to a hydroxyl group, including cyclic derivatives where Yl and Y~
taken together form a ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure (such as pinacol or the like);
R50 represents O or S;
R51 represents N3, SH2, NHS, N02 or OR'7;
R5~ represents hydrogen, a lower allcyl, an amine, OR'7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R51 and R5~ taken together with the phosphorous atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure Xl represents a halogen;
XZ and X3 each independently represent a hydrogen or a halogen;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
In preferred embodiments, the ring A is a 5, 6 or 7 membered ring, e.g., represented by the formula n -N
and more preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring. The ring may, optionally, be further substituted.
In preferred embodiments, W represents -B~ or ---Y2 Rs In preferred embodiments, R1 is O
eRao N
wherein R36 is a small hydrophobic group, e.g., a lower allcyl or a halogen and R3g is hydrogen, or, R3~ and R37 together form a 4-7-membered heterocycle including the N
and the Ca, carbon, as defined for A above; and R4o represents a C-terminally linlced amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C-terminally linl~ed peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group.
In preferred embodiments, R2 is absent, or represents a small hydrophobic group such as a lower alkyl or a halogen.
In preferred embodiments, R3 is a hydrogen, or a small hydrophobic group such as a lower allcyl or a halogen.
In preferred embodiments, RS is a hydrogen, or a halogenated lower allcyl.
In preferred embodiments, Xl is a fluorine, and X2 and X3, if halogens, are fluorine.
Also deemed as equivalents are any compounds which can be hydrolytically converted into any of the aforementioned compounds including boronic acid esters and halides, and carbonyl equivalents including acetals, hemiacetals, lcetals, and hemilcetals, and cyclic dipeptide analogs.
Longer peptide sequences are needed for the inhibition of certain proteases and improve the specificity of the inhibition in some cases.
In preferred embodiments, the subject method utilizes, as a DPIV inhibitor, a boronic acid analogs of an amino acid. For example, the present invention contemplates the 'use of boro-prolyl derivatives in the subject method.
Exemplary boronic acid derived inhibitors of the present invention are represented by the general formula:
R1/N B~OR~2 I
OR~~
wherein Rl represents a C-terminally linlced amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C- terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group, or o s o or -S-Rg ;
Rs Rs O
R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, an allcyl, an allcenyl, an allcynyl, an aryl, -(CH~)m R7, -(CH2)m OH, -(CH~)m O-alkyl, -(CH~)m O-allcenyl, -(CH2),n O-allcynyl, -(CH2)m O-(CH~)m R7, -(CH2)1ri SH, -(CH2)m S-alkyl, -(CH~)m S-alkenyl, -(CH2)m S-allcynyl, -(CH2)m S-(CH2)m R7, iR$ II ~R8 NH2 -(CH2)m-N~R9 s -(CH2)n-C-NCR ~ -(CH2)n-NHZ-IC-NH2 O O O
-(CH2)n-C-O-R7 ~ -(CH2)n-C-alkyl ~ -(CH2)n-C-alkenyl or -(CH2)n-C-alkynyl -(CH2)n-C-(CH2)m-R7 R7 represents an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloalkenyl, or a heterocycle;
Rg and Rg each independently represent hydrogen, alkyl, allcenyl, -(CH2)m R7, -C(=O)-alkyl, -C(=O)-allcenyl, -C(=O)-allcynyl, -C(=O)-(CH2)1ri R7, or Rg and Rg taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
Rll and R12 each independently represent hydrogen, a alkyl, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or Rll and Rl~ talcen together with the O-B-O
atoms to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having fiom 5 to atoms in the ring structure;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
In other embodiments, the subject DPIV inhibitors include an aldehyde analogs of proline or prolyl derivatives. Exemplary aldehyde-derived inhibitors of the present invention are represented by the general formula:
i N ~O
R~
wherein Rl represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C- terminally linlced peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group, or O S
or -S-Rg ;
Rg represents hydrogen, a halogen, an alkyl, an allcenyl, an allcynyl, an aryl, -(CH~)ln R7, -(CH~)m OH, -(CH~)~; O-alkyl, -(CH2)m O-alkenyl, -(CH2)ln O-allcynyl, -(CH2)m O-(CH2)m R7, -(CH~)~; SH, -(CH2)m S-alkyl, -(CH2)m S-allcenyl, -(CH2)m S-allcynyl, or -(CH2)m S-(CH2)m R7, ~Ra ~ ~Ra iIH2 -(CHp)m-N~R9 , -(CH2)n-C-N~ ' R9 -(CH2)n-NHZ-C-NH2 p p O
-(CHp)n--IC-p-R7 ~ -(CH2)n-CI-alkyl ~ -(CH2)n--IC-alkenyl or -(CH2)n-C-alkynyl -(CH2)n-C-(CH2)m-R7 R7 represents an aryl, a cycloallcyl, a cycloalkenyl, or a heterocycle;
Rg and R9 each independently represent hydrogen, alkyl, allcenyl, -(CH2)ln R7, -C(=O)-alkyl, -C(=O)-alkenyl, -C(=O)-alkynyl, -C(=O)-(CH2),n R7, or Rg and Rg taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure; and m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
In yet further embodiments, the subject DPIV inhibitors are halo-methyl lcetone analogs of an amino acid. Exemplary inhibitors of this class include compounds represented by the general formula:
i ,N O
R~
X ~3 wherein Rl represents a C-terminally linlced amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C- terminally linlced peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group, or o S o . ' or -S-R6 , R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, an alkyl, an allcenyl, an allcynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m R7, -(CH~)m OH, -(CH2)m O-alkyl, -(CH2)1ri O-allcenyl, -(CH2)1ri O-allcynyl, -(CH2)1ri O-(CH~)m R7, -(CH2)1ri SH, -(CH~),ri S-allcyl, -(CH2)mS-allcenyl, -(CH2)m S-allcynyl, or -(CH2),n S-(CH2)m R7, i Rg ~ ~Rg NH2 -(CH2)m-N~ , -(CH2)n-C-N~ ' II ' R9 R9 -(CH2)n-NH2-C-NH2 p O O
, , (CH2)n-C-O-R7 -(CH2)n-IC-alkyl -(CH2)n-IC-alkenyl O O
II , or II
-(CH2)n-C-alkynyl -(CH2)n-C-(CH2)m-R7 R7 represents an aryl, a cycloallcyl, a cycloalkenyl, or a heterocycle;
Rg and Rg each independently represent hydrogen, alkyl, allcenyl, -(CH2)m R7, -C(=O)-alkyl, -C(=O)-allcenyl, -C(=O)-allcynyl, -C(=O)-(CH2)m R7, or Rg and R~
taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
Xl, X~ and Xg each represent a hydrogen or a halogen; and m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
In preferred embodiments, the DPIV inhibitor is a peptide or peptidomimetic including a prolyl group or analog thereof in the P 1 specificity position, and a nonpolar amino acid in the P2 specificity position, e.g., a nonpolar amino acid such as alanine, leucine, isoleucine, valine, proline, phenylalanine, tryptophan or methionine, or an analog thereof. For example, the DPIV inhibitor may include an Ala-Pro or Pro-Pro dipeptide sequence or equivalent thereof, and be represented in the general formulas:
Rz Rz Rz R3o W Rso-N R W
R3 ~ 3 0 or In preferred embodiments, the ring A is a 5-, 6-, or 7-membered ring, e.g., represented by the formula n -N
In preferred embodiments, R32 is a small hydrophobic group, e.g., a lower alkyl or a halogen.
In preferred embodiments, R3o represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group.
In preferred embodiments, R2 is absent, or represents a small hydrophobic group such as a lower alkyl or a halogen.
In preferred embodiments, R3 is a hydrogen, or a small hydrophobic group such as a lower alkyl or a halogen.
Another representative class of compounds for use in the subject method include peptide and peptidomimetics of (D)-Ala-(L)-Ala, e.g., preserving the diasteromeric orientation of the substituents. Such inhibitors include compounds represented by the general formula:
H
N\L/W
O Rgz wherein W represents a functional group which reacts with an active site residue of the targeted protease, as for example, -CN, -CH--NRS, I I O /Y1 ~ 15o O
-$-X1 , -PI-X1 a -BAY ~ - i -R52 or p 2 R51 R5 Rl represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C- terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group, or o s , o or -S-R5 R3 represents hydrogen or a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower allcenyl, a lower allcynyl, a carbonyl (such as a carboxyl, an ester, a formate, or a lcetone), a thiocarbonyl (such as a thioester, a thioacetate, or a thioformate), an amino, an acylamino, an amido, a cyano, a nitro, an azido, a sulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfonamido, -(CH~),ri R7, -(CH~)m OH, -(CH2)m O-lower allcyl, -(CH2)m O-lower alkenyl, -(CH~)ri O-(CH~)~; R7, -(CH~)m SH, -(CH2)m S-lower alkyl, -(CH~)m S-lower allcenyl, -(CH2)ri S-(CH2),n R7;
RS represents H, an alkyl, an alkenyl, an alkynyl, -C(Xl)(X~)X3, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH~)n-OH, -(CHZ)n-O-alkyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-allcynyl, -(CH~)n-O-(CH~)m-R7, -(CH2)n-SH, -(CH~)n-S-alkyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkenyl, -(CH~)n-S-allcynyl, -(CH~)n-S-(CH2)m-R7, -C(O)C(O)NH2, -C(O)C(O)OR'7;
R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a allcyl, a alkenyl, a allcynyl, an aryl, -(CH~)~ R7, -(CH2)m OH, -(CH~)lri O-alkyl, -(CH~)m O-allcenyl, -(CH2),n O-allcynyl, -(CH~)m O-(CH2)m R7, -(CH~)m SH, -(CH2)m S-alkyl, -(CH~),ri S-allcenyl, -(CH~)n.;
S-allcynyl, -(CH2)m S-(CH2)m R7, -(CH2)m-N~ ~ -(CH2)n'-'~C-NLRB ' NH2 , R9 ~R9 -(CH2)n'NHZ-C-NH2 O O O
-(CH2)n-C-O-R7 ~ -(CH2)n'-'C-alkyl ~ -(CH2)n-IC-alkenyl -(CH2)n-CI-alkynyl ~ or -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7 R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, arall~yl, cycloallcyl, cycloallcenyl, or heterocycle;
R'7 represents, for each occurrence, hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted allcyl, all~enyl, aryl, arallcyl, cycloallcyl, cycloallcenyl, or heterocycle;
R61 and R6~, indepedently, represent small hydrophobic groups;
Y1 and Y2', independently, are OH, or a group capable of being hydrolyzed to a hydroxyl group, including cyclic derivatives where Y1 and Y2 talcen together form a ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure (such as pinacol or the lilce), R50 represents O or S;
R51 represents N3, SHE, NHS, NO~ or OR'7;
R5~ represents hydrogen, a lower all~yl, an amine, OR'7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R51 and R52 talcen together with the phosphorous atom to wluch they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure Xl represents a halogen;
X~ and X3 each represent a hydrogen or a halogen m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
In preferred embodiments, Rl is sRao N
wherein R36 is a small hydrophobic group, e.g., a lower allcyl or a halogen and R38 is hydrogen, or, R36 and R37 together form a 4-7 membered heterocycle including the N
and the Ca, carbon, as defined for A above; and R4o represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group.
In preferred embodiments, R3 is a hydrogen, or a small hydrophobic group such as a lower allcyl or a halogen.
In prefeiTed embodiments, RS is a hydrogen, or a halogentated lower alkyl.
In preferred embodiments, Xl is a fluorine, and X2 and X3, if halogens, are fluorine.
In preferred embodiments, R~1 and Rg2, independently, represent low alkyls, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, tert-butyl or the like.
Also included are such peptidomimetics as olefins, phosphonates, aza-amino acid analogs and the like.
Another representative class of compounds for use in the method of the present invention are represented by the general formula (as described in U.S.
provisional application entitled "Methods for Regulating Glucose Metabolism, and Reagents Related Thereto" filed on Nov. 26, 2001, which is incorporated herein by reference):
R4.N~U.N W
R3 R~
wherein, Rl represents hydrogen, halogen or lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, or lower allcynyl, preferably lower alkyl such as methyl, ethyl, etc., optionally substituted by one or more small substitutents such as halogen, hydroxy, allcoxy, etc.;
R2 represents a branched lower alkyl, arallcyl, aryl, heteroaralkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or cycloallcylallcyl, preferably a bullcy hydrophobic group, such as cyclohexyl, t-butyl, etc., optionally substituted by one or more small substitutents such as halogen, hydroxy, alkoxy, etc.;
R3 represents hydrogen or an amino-protecting group, preferably hydrogen;
R4 represents hydrogen, a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, a C-terminally linlced peptide or peptide analog, an amino-protecting group, or -C- -~- .
' ~ '~ II ' O
R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a alkyl, an allcenyl, an allcynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m R7, -(CH2)m OH, -(CHa,),n O-alkyl, -(CH2)m O-allcenyl, -(CH2)m O-allcynyl, -(CHa)n,-O-(CH2),n R7, -(CH~)m SH, -(CH~,)m S-allcyl, -(CH2),n S-allcenyl, -(CHa),n S-allcynyl, -(CH2)m S-(CH2)m R7;
R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, arallcyl, cycloalkyl, cycloallcenyl, or heterocycle;
R'7 represents, for each occurrence, hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, allcenyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloallcenyl, or heterocycle;
U is absent or represents -C(=O)-, -C(=S)-, -P(=O)(OR8)-, -S(02)-, or -S(O)-, preferably -C(=O)-, -C(=S)-, or -S(02)- ;
W represents a functional group which reacts with an active site residue of the targeted protease, as for example, -CN, -CH=NR53, O O -B~Y1 -PSOR O
-P-X1 ' ~Y2 ~ ~ 52 pr ~ [~53 preferably ~Y1 O
-B, or Y2 ~ R53 Yl and Y2 are, independently, OH, or a group capable of being hydrolyzed, e.g., under physiologic conditions to a hydroxyl group, such as allcoxy, aryloxy, etc., including cyclic derivatives where Yl and Y2 are connected via a ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure (such as pinacol or the like);
R5o represents O or S;
R51 represents N3, SH, NH2, NO2 or OR'7;
R52 represents hydrogen, a lower allcyl, an amine, OR'7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R51 and Rsa taken together with the phosphorous atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
R53 represents hydrogen, an alkyl, an allcenyl, an alkynyl, -C(X1)(X2)-X3, -(CHa)m R7, -(CH2)"-OH, -(CH2)"O-allcyl, -(CHa)n O-allcenyl, -(CH2),; O-allcynyl, -(CHa)"O-(CH2)m R7, -(CH2)"SH, -(CH2)ri S-alkyl, -(CH2)n-S-allcenyl, -(CH2)"S-allcynyl, -(CH2)"S-(CH2)m R7, -C(O)C(O)NH2, -C(O)C(O)OR'7;
Xl represents a halogen, preferably a fluorine;
X2 and X3 each represent a hydrogen or a halogen, preferably a hydrogen or a fluorine;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8;
and n is ari integer in the range of 1 to 8.
In preferred embodiments, the subject method utilizes, as a DPIV inhibitor, a boronic acid analog of an amino acid. For example, the present invention contemplates the use of boro-alanine derivatives in the subject method.
Exemplary boronic acid derived inhibitors of the present invention are represented by the general formula:
O R~
/N ~ ~OR~2 R2 Rs OR~~
wherein Rl represents hydrogen, halogen or lower alkyl, lower allcenyl, or lower allcynyl, preferably lower alkyl such as methyl, ethyl, etc., optionally substituted by one or more small substitutents such as halogen, hydroxy, allcoxy, etc.;
R2 represents a branched lower alkyl, arallcyl, aryl, heteroarallcyl, heteroaryl, cycloallcyl, or cycloallcylallcyl, preferably a bulky hydrophobic group, such as cyclohexyl, t-butyl, etc., optionally substituted by one or more small substitutents such as halogen, hydroxy, allcoxy, etc.;
R3 represents hydrogen or an amino-protecting group, preferably hydrogen;
R4 represents hydrogen, a C-terminally linlced amino acid residue or amino acid analog, a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, an amino-protecting group, or -O- -C- -O-O
preferably hydrogen.
R~ represents hydrogen, a halogen, a allcyl, an allcenyl, an allcynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m R7, -(CH2)m OH, -(CHZ)m O-alkyl, -(CH2)m O-alkenyl, -(CH2)m O-allcynyl, -(CH2)n; O-(CH2),n R7, -(CH2),n SH, -(CH2),n S-alkyl, -(CH2)n; S-allcenyl, -(CH2)n; S-allcynyl, -(CHa)m S-(CH2)m R7;
R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloallcenyl, or heterocycle;
Rl i and Ria each independently represent hydrogen, an alkyl, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or Rll and Rla taken together with the O-B-O
atoms to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure; and m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
In other embodiments, the subject DPIV inhibitors include aldehyde analogs of alanine or alanyl derivatives. Exemplary aldehyde-derived inhibitors of the present invention are represented by the general formula:
i 3 O R, N H
wherein Rl represents hydrogen, halogen or lower allcyl, lower allcenyl, or lower allcynyl, preferably lower alkyl such as methyl, ethyl, etc., optionally substituted by one or more small substitutents such as halogen, hydroxy, allcoxy, etc.;
R2 represents a branched lower allcyl, aralkyl, aryl, heteroarallcyl, heteroaryl, cycloallcyl, or cycloallcylallcyl, preferably a bullcy hydrophobic group, such as cyclohexyl, t-butyl, etc., optionally substituted by one or more small substitutents such as halogen, hydroxy, allcoxy, etc.;
R3 represents hydrogen or an amino-protecting group, preferably hydrogen;
R4 represents hydrogen, a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, a C-terminally linlced peptide or peptide analog, an amino-protecting group, or - - -C- -O-' ~ '~ II ' O
preferably hydrogen.
R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a alkyl, an alkenyl, an allcynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)mR~, -(CH2)m OH, -(CH2)m O-alkyl, -(CH2)m O-allcenyl, -(CH2)m-O-allcynyl, -(CH2)m O-(CH2)m R7, -(CH2)m SH, -(CH2)m S-alkyl, -(CH2)m S-allcenyl, -(CH2)m S-alkynyl, -(CH2)n; S-(CH2)m R7;
R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, arallcyl, cycloalkyl, cycloallcenyl, or heterocycle;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
In yet fuxther embodiments, the subject DPIV inhibitors are halo-methyl ketone analogs of an amino acid. Exemplary inhibitors of this class include compounds represented by the general formula:
O R~ X1 X
R4 W ~ ~ X
Background of the Invention The immune system can normally distinguish "self' from "non-self'. Some immune system cells (lymphocytes) become sensitized against "self' tissue cells, but are normally controlled by other lymphocytes. When the normal control process is disrupted, allowing lymphocytes to avoid suppression, or when there is an alteration in some body tissue so that it is no longer recognized by the immune system as "self', autoimmune disorders develop. The mechanisms that cause disrupted control or tissue alterations are not well known. One theory holds that various microorganisms and drugs may trigger some of these changes, particularly in people with genetic predisposition to autoimmune disorders. There are a number of autoimmune diseases including, for example, multiple sclerosis (MS), rheumatoid arthritis (RA), and Type I diabetes.
Type I diabetes is a progressive autoimmune disease, in which the beta cells that produce insulin are slowly destroyed by the body's own immune system.
White blood cells called T lymphocytes produce immune factors called cytol~ines that attack and gradually destroy the beta cells of the pancreas. Important cytol~ines are interleul~in-1-beta, tmnor necrosis factor-alpha, and interferon-gamma.
Specific proteins are also critical in the process. They include glutamic acid decarboxylase (GAD), insulin, and islet cell antigens. These proteins serve as autoantigens.
That is, they trigger the self attaclc of the immune system on its body's own beta cells. It is unknown what first starts this cascade of immune events, but evidence suggests that both a genetic predisposition and environmental factors, such as a viral infection, are involved.
As a result of autoimmune diabetes, the pancreas produces little or no insulin, and insulin must be injected daily for the survival of the diabetic. Insulin, a hormone produced by the pancreas, is needed to convert sugar, starches and other food into glucose and to make it available to the body's cells for energy. In muscle, adipose (fat) and connective tissues, insulin facilitates the entry of glucose into the cells by an action on the cell membranes. The ingested glucose is normally converted in the liver to C02 and H20 (50%); to glycogen (5%); and to fat (30-40%), the latter being stored in fat depots. Fatty acids from the adipose tissues are circulated, returned to the liver for re-synthesis of triacylglycerol and metabolized to lcetone bodies for utilization by the tissues. The fatty acids are also metabolized by other organs. Fat formation is a major pathway for carbohydrate utilization. The net effect of insulin is to promote the storage and use of carbohydrates, protein and fat.
Some complications arising from long-standing diabetes are vascular disease, microvascular disease, eye complications, diabetic nephropathy, diabetic neuropathy, diabetic foot problems, and slcin and mucous membrane problems. The action of Type 1 diabetes is to cause hyperglycemia (elevated blood glucose concentration) and a tendency towards diabetic lcetoacidosis (DIVA). Currently treatment requires chronic administration of insulin. Sporadic or persistent incidence of hyperglycemia can be controlled by administering insulin. Uncontrolled hyperglycemia can further damage the cells of the pancreas which produce insulin (the (3-islet cells) and in the long term create greater insulin deficiencies.
Type 1 diabetes (Insulin dependent diabetes mellitus, IDDM) represents 20%
of all human diabetes, and is the most serious form of the disease, with highest morbidity an mortality. Up to 800,000 people in the US are estimated to have type 1 diabetes, with about 30,000 new cases diagnosed each year. In addition., the incidence of IDDM has been rising over the past few decades in certain regions of the US
and some European countries, particularly in Finland and England.
_2_ Currently, oral sulfonylureas and insulin injections are the only two therapeutic agents available in the United States for treatment of Diabetes mellitus.
Both agents have the potential for producing hypoglycemia as a side effect, reducing the blood glucose concentration to dangerous levels. There is no generally applicable and consistently effective means of maintaining an essentially normal fluctuation in glucose levels in DM. The resultant treatment attempts to minimize the risks of hypoglycemia while keeping the glucose levels below a target value. The drug regimen is combined with control of dietary intake of carbohydrates to keep glucose levels in control. However, to date, there has been no cure for many autoimmune disorders, including type 1 diabetes. Clearly, a strong need exists for new, more effective treatments for these diseases.
Summary of the Invention The invention generally relates to improved methods for treatment or prophylaxis in animal subjects (including hu~.nans) of autoimmune disorders including Type I diabetes, septic shock, multiple sclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease (IBD) and Crohn's disease.
One aspect of the invention relates to a method for treating a marmnal having an autoimmune disease, such as Type I diabetes, septic shock, multiple sclerosis, IBD, or Crohn's disease, comprising administering to the mammal a dipeptidylpeptidase IV
(DPIV) inhibitor, wherein administering the inhibitor induces immunosuppression and modulates the pharmacolcinetics of polypeptide hormones required for tissue regeneration.
Brief Description of the Drawings Figure 1 is a diagrammatic representation of the synthesis of a boro-Pro compound.
Figure 2 is a diagrammatic representation of the synthesis of a Cyclohexylglycine -bozo-Ala.
Figure 3 is a time course of inactivation curve of Cyclohexylglycine-boro-Ala at pH 8.
Figure 4 is a bar graph illustrating DPPIV enzyme activity as measured from rat serum samples before and 1 hour after administration of Cyclohexylglycine-boro-Ala.
Figure 5 is a time course of incidence of Type 1 diabetes in NOD mice upon administration of Val-boro-Pro, or Cyclohexylglycine-boro-Ala, as compared to control.
Figure 6 is a bar graph illustrating the incidence of Type 1 diabetes in NOD
mice upon administration of Val-boro-Pro or Cyclohexylglycine-born-Ala, as compared to control at 120 days after start of treatment.
Detailed Description of the Invention i. Overview of the Inve~ctioh The present invention provides methods and compositions generally to prevent, reduce, or eliminate autoimmune disorders, such as Type 1 diabetes, septic shoclc, multiple sclerosis, IBD or Crohn's disease in animals. As described in greater detail below, the subject method includes the administration, to an animal, of a composition including one or more dipeptidylpeptidase inhibitors, especially inhibitors of the dipeptidylpeptidase IV (DPIV) enzyme or other enzyme of similar specificity, in an amount which modulates the pharmacol~inetics of polypeptide hormones in a manner that produces tissue regeneration (e.g., such as may be manifest in an increase in tissue mass). While not being bound by any particular theory, it may be useful to deliver an amount of DPIV inhibitor sufficient to suppress an autoimmune component of the disease (such as a reduce a cellular and/or humoral response against the target tissue). Other immunosuppressive agents can be administered conjointly.
For instance, in certain embodiments the method involves administration of a DPIV inhibitor, preferably at a predetermined times) during a 24-hour period, in an aanount effective to improve one or more aberrant indices associated with Type diabetes, septic shock, multiple sclerosis, IBD or Crohn's disease.
The present invention provides methods and compositions for regeneration of tissues damaged or destroyed as a result of autoimmune diseases by altering the half life of a variety of different polypeptide hormones through inhibiting the proteolysis of one or more peptide hormones by DPIV or some other proteolytic activity.
The subject method can be used to increase the half life of proglucagon-derived peptides including glucagon, glucagon-lilce peptide-1 (GLP-1), glucagon-like peptide-2 (GLP-2, PG 126-158), glicentin (corresponding to PG 1-69), oxyntomodulin (PG 33-69), glicentin-related pancreatic polypeptide (GRPP, PG 1-30), intervening peptide-2 (IP-2, PG 111-122amide), glucose-dependent insulinotropic peptides, vasoactive intestinal polypeptide (VIP), vasostatin I
and II, peptide histidine methionine (PHM), peptide histidine isoleucine (PHI), secretin, gastric inhibitory peptide, gastrin-releasing peptide (GRP), growth hormone-releasing hormone (GHRH), helospectin, helodermin, pituitary adenylate cyclase-activating peptide (PACAP, PACAP 27, and PACAP 38), and PACAP-related peptide (PRP), as well as calcitonin and secretin.
For instance, autoimmune (Type 1) diabetes leads to apoptotic destruction of [3-pancreatic islets responsible for insulin secretion. Polypeptide hormones, such as exendin-4, an analog of glucagon-like peptide 1 (GLP-1), have been shown to stimulate the regeneration of the pancreas and expansion of (3-cells mass by processes of both neogenesis and proliferation of [3-cells. Support for [3-cell neogenesis being a direct effect of the exendin-4 comes from the finding that duct cells expressed GLP-1 receptor, both at the mRNA and protein levels. (Xu et. al. (1999) Diabetes 48:2270-2276). Thus, modulation of plasma half life of GLP-1 and analogs thexeof hold promise in a novel therapy to stimulate (3-cell growth, and differentiation when administered to diabetic individuals with reduced (3-cell mass.
In addition, GLP-1 and the longer acting GLP-1 agonist exendin-4 stimulate the expression of the IDX-1 homeodomain protein in the pancreas when administered to mice. Expression of both immunoreactive IDX-1 and (3-galactosidase expressed from Lac2 reporter transgene driven by the IDX-1 promoter occurs in the pancreatic ducts and the exocrine pancreas. It is also known that IDX-1 is required for the growth of the pancreas and that the epithelium of the pancreatic ducts and the centrolobular terminal ducts in the acinar tissue are the source of the differentiation of new (3-cells ((3-cell neogenesis). (Stoffers et al (2000) Diabetes 49:741-748). Thus, modulation of plasma half life of GLP-1 and analogs thereof similarly hold promise in a novel therapy to stimulate [3-cell neogenesis.
Furthermore, the activation of inducible nitric oxide synthase (iNOS) by inflammatory cytolcines is considered a mediator of destruction in (3-cells.
Recent findings showed that the neuropeptide pituitary adenyl cyclase-activating polypeptide (PACAP), whose distribution was identified in pancreatic neurons, inhibited nitric oxide (NO) production in cytokine-activated macrophages. (Selciya (2000) Biochem Biophys Res Comm (2000) 278(1):211-216) Therefore, modulation of half life of PACAP and analogs thereof may be useful in treatment of Type 1 diabetes.
GLP-2, for example, has been identified as a factor responsible for inducing proliferation of intestinal epithelium. See, for example, Druclcer et al.
(1996) PNAS
93:7911. The subject method can be used as part of a regimen for treating injury, inflammation, or resection of intestinal tissue, e.g., where enhanced growth and repair of the intestinal mucosal epithelial is desired. Thus modulation of half life of GPL-2 and analogs thereof hold promise for the treatment of gut-related autoimmune diseases, such as, for example, inflammatory bowel disease (IBD).
Rheumatoid arthritis (RA) is a chronic and debilitating autoimmune disease of unknown ethiology, characterized by chronic inflammation in the joints and subsequent destruction of the cartilage and bone. Neuropeptide vasoactive intestinal peptide (VIP) has been shown to significantly reduce incidence and severity of arthritis, completely abrogating joint swelling and destruction of cartilage and bode.
(Delgado (2001) Nat Med 7(5) 563-568) Consequently modulation of half life of VIP
and analogs thereof holds promise for the treatment of rheumatoid arthritis.
In addition, VIP itself as well as more stable VIP derived agents, have been used or proposed as efficient therapeutic treatments of several autoimmune disorders, such as septic shock, multiple sclerosis, Crohn's disease, and autoimmune diabetes.
(Gomariz (2001) Curr Pharm Des 7(2):89-111) Additionally, the subject method can be used to alter the pharmacol~inetics of Peptide YY (PYY) and neuropeptide Y (NPY), both members of the pancreatic polypeptide family, as DPIV has been implicated in the processing of those peptides in a manner which alters receptor selectivity.
DPIV has also been implicated in the metabolism and inactivation of growth hormone-releasing factor (GHRF). GHRF is a member of the family of homologous peptides that includes glucagon, secretin, vasoactive intestinal peptide (VIP), peptide histidine isoleucine (PHI), pituitary adenylate cyclase activating peptide (PACAP), gastric inhibitory .peptide (GIP) and helodermin. I~ubialc et al. (1994) Peptide Res 7:153. GHRF is secreted by the hypothalamus, and stimulates the release of growth hormone (GH) from the anterior pituitary. Thus, the subject method can be used to improve clinical therapy for certain growth hormone deficient children, and in clinical therapy of adults to improve nutrition and to alter body composition (muscle vs. fat).
The subject method can also be used in veterinary practice, for example, to develop higher yield mills production and higher yield, leaner livestoclc.
Additional other autoimmune diseases and conditions that may be treated with the methods of the present invention are: systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE), ixmnunovasculitis, myasthenia gravis, acute immunological arthritis, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, Grave's disease, rheumatoid synovitis, hereditary angioedema, hyperacute allograft rejection, xenograft rejection, infectious disease and sepsis, endotoxemia, scleroderma, glomerulonephritis, HIV infection, multiple sclerosis, atrophic gastritis, pancreatitis, allergic encephalomyelitis, thyroxicosis, sympathetic ophthalmia, allergic reactions, multiple organ failure, allergic reactions, bullous diseases, urticaria, cryoglobulinemia, renal cortical necrosis, transplant organ reperfusion, post-ischemic reperfusion conditions, lupus nephritis, Crohn's disease, dermatomyositis, proliferative nephritis, type II collagen-induced arthritis, Bahcet's syndrome, Sjogren's syndrome, thermal injury, preeclampsia, thyroiditis, acute gouty arthritis, primary biliary cirrhosis inflammation, cranial nerve damage in meningitis, renal ischemia, anaphylaxis, and bowel inflannnation.
In general, the inhibitors of the subject method will be small molecules, e.g., with molecular weights less than 7500 amu, preferably less than 5000 amu, and even more preferably less than 2000 amu and even 1000 amu. In preferred embodiments, the inhibitors will be orally active.
In preferred embodiments, a DPIV inhibitor of the present invention has a Iii for DPIV inhibition of 1.0 nM or less, more preferably of 0.1 nM or less, and even more preferably of 0.01 nM or less. Indeed, inhibitors with Ki values in the picomolar and even femtamolar range are contemplated.
Preferably, the compounds utilized in the subject method will have an EC50 for the desired biological effect, such as for example, increase in the plasma half life of a peptide hormone that promotes tissue regeneration in the micromolar or less range more preferably in the nanomolar or less range and even more preferably in the picomolar or femtomolar range.
In certain embodiments, the subject inhibitors are peptidyl compounds (including peptidomimetics) which are optimized, e.g., generally by selection of the Ca, substituents, for the substrate specificity of the targeted proteolytic activity. These peptidyl compounds will include a functional group, such as in place of the scissile peptide bond, which facilitates inhibition of a serine-, cysteine- or aspartate-type protease, as appropriate. For example, the inhibitor can be a peptidyl oc-dilcetone or a peptidyl a,-l~eto ester, a peptide haloall~ylketone, a peptide sulfonyl fluoride, a peptidyl boronate, a peptide epoxide, a peptidyl diazomethanes, a peptidyl phosphonate, isocoumaxins, benzoxazin-4-ones, carbamates, isocyantes, isatoic anhydrides or the lilce. Such functional groups have bee provided in other protease _g_ inhibitors, and general routes for their synthesis are known. See, for example, Angelastro et al., J. Med Chem. 33:11-13 (1990); Bey et al., EPO 363,284; Bey et al., EPO 364,344; Grubb et al., WO 88/10266; Higuchi et al., EPO 393,457; Ewoldt et al., Molecular Immunolo~y 29(6):713-721 (1992); Hernandez et al., Journal of Medicinal Chemistry 35(6): 1121-1129 (1992); Vlasalc et al., J Virolo~y 63(5):2056-2062 (1989); Hudig et al., J Immunol 147(4):1360-136 (1991); Odalcc et al., Biochemistry 30(8):2217-2227 (1991); Vijayalalcshmi et al., Biochemistry 30(8):2175-2183 (1991);
Kam et al. , Thrombosis and Haemostasis 64(1):133-137 (1990); Powers et al., J
Cell Biochem 39(1):33-46 (1989); Powers et al., Proteinase Inhibitors, Barren et al., Eds., Elsevier, pp. 55-152 (1986); Powers et al., Biochemistry 29(12):3108-3118 (1990);
Oweida et al., Thrombosis Research 58(2):391-397 (1990); Hudig et al., Molecular Immunolo~y 26(8):793-798 (1989); Orlowski et al., Archives of Biochemistry and Biophysics 269(1):125-136 (1989); zL1111n0 et al., Biochimica et Biophysica Acta.
967(3):331-340 (1988); Kam et al., Biochemistry 27(7):2547-2557 (1988);
Parlces et al., Biochem J. 230:509-516 (1985); Green et al., J. Biol. Chem. 256:1923-1928 (1981); Angliker et al., Biochem. J. 241:871-875 (1987); Puri et al., Arch.
Biochem.
Biophys. 27:346-358 (1989); Hanada et al., Proteinase Inhibitors: Medical and Biological Aspects, Katunuma et al., Eds., Springer-Verlag pp. 25-36 (1983);
Kajiwara et al., Biochem. Int. 15:935-944 (1987); Rao et al., Thromb. Res.
47:635-637 (1987); Tsujinaka et al., Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 153:1201-1208 (1988)). See also U.S. Patents Bachovchin et al. 4,935,493; Bachovchin et al.
5,462,928; Powers et al. 5,543,396; Hanlco et al. 5,296,604; and the PCT
publication of Ferring PCT/GB94/02615.
In other embodiments, the inhibitor is a non-peptidyl compound, e.g., which can be identified by such drug screening assays as described herein. These inhibitors can be, merely to, illustrate, synthetic organic compounds, natural products, nucleic acids or carbohydrates.
A representative class of compounds for use in the method of the present invention are represented by the general formula (as described in the PCT
application No. PCT/LTS99/02294, which is incorporated herein by reference):
AJ
~\W
wherein A represents a 4-8-membered heterocycle including the N and the Ca, carbon;
Z represents C or N; , W represents a functional group which reacts with an active site residue of the targeted protease, as for example, -CN, -CH=NRS, -p-X1 ' O /Y i 5o O
-p-X1 ~ B~Y ~ i R52 or Rl represents a C-terminally linlced amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C- terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group, or o S o or -S-R6 ;
Rs Re O
R2 is absent or represents one or more substitutions to the ring A, each of which can independently be a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower allcenyl, a lower alleynyl, a carbonyl (such as a carboxyl, an ester, a fonnate, or a lcetone), a thiocarbonyl (such as a thioester, a thioacetate, or a thioformate), an amino, an acylamino, an amide, a cyano, a vitro, an azido, a sulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfonamide, -(CH~)"i R7, -(CH~)m OH, -(CH2)m O-lower allcyl, -(CH~)m O-lower allcenyl, -(CH2)ri O-(CH2),n R7, -(CH~)m SH, -(CH2)m S-lower alkyl, -(CH2),n S-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)ri S-(CH2)m R7;
if X is N, R3 represents hydrogen, if X is C, R3 represents hydrogen or a halogen, a lower allcyl, a lower allcenyl, a lower allcynyl, a carbonyl (such as a carboxyl, an ester, a formate, or a lcetone), a thiocaxbonyl (such as a thioester, a thioacetate, or a thioformate), an amino, an acylamino, an amido, a cyano, a vitro, an azido, a sulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfonamido, -(CH2)m R7, -(CH2)m OH, -(CH2),n O-lower allcyl, -(CH2)m O-lower allcenyl, -(CH~)ri O-(CH~)lr; R7, -(CH2)1ri SH, -(CH~)m S-lower allcyl, -(CH2)m S-lower allcenyl, -(CH~)ri S-(CH~)m R7;
RS represents H, an allcyl, an allcenyl, an allcynyl, -C(Xl)(X2)X3, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH~)n-OH, -(CH~)n-O-alkyl, -(CH~)n-O-alkenyl, -(CH~)n-O-allcynyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH~)m-R7, -(CH~)n-SH, -(CHZ)n-S-alkyl, -(CH2)n-S-allcenyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7, -C(O)C(O)NH2, -C(O)C(O)OR'7;
Rg represents hydrogen, a halogen, a allcyl, a alkenyl, a alkynyl, an aryl, -(CH~)m R7, -(CH2)m OH, -(CH~)~; O-alkyl, -(CH~)m O-allcenyl, -(CH~)m O-allcynyl, -(CH~)~ O-(CH2)m R7, -(CH2)m SH, -(CH2)1ri S-alkyl, -(CH2)m S-allcenyl, -(CH2)ln S-allcynyl, -(CH2)mS-(CH2)~; R7, ~R$ ~ ~R$ NH2 -(CH2)m-N~ ~ -(CH2)n-C-N~ ' II
R9 R9 -(CH2)n'NHp-C-NH2 (CH2)n-C-O-R7 -(CH2)n-C-alkyl -(CH2)n'-'IC-alkenyl O O
or I I
-(CH2)n-C-alkynyi ~ -(CH2)n-C-yCH2)m-R7 R7 represents, independently for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, arallcyl, cycloalkyl, cycloallcenyl, or heterocycle;
R'7 represents, independently for each occurrence, hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, allcenyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloallcyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
Y1 and Y~ can, independently , be OH, or a group capable of being hydrolyzed to a hydroxyl group, including cyclic derivatives where Yl and Y~
taken together form a ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure (such as pinacol or the like);
R50 represents O or S;
R51 represents N3, SH2, NHS, N02 or OR'7;
R5~ represents hydrogen, a lower allcyl, an amine, OR'7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R51 and R5~ taken together with the phosphorous atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure Xl represents a halogen;
XZ and X3 each independently represent a hydrogen or a halogen;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
In preferred embodiments, the ring A is a 5, 6 or 7 membered ring, e.g., represented by the formula n -N
and more preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring. The ring may, optionally, be further substituted.
In preferred embodiments, W represents -B~ or ---Y2 Rs In preferred embodiments, R1 is O
eRao N
wherein R36 is a small hydrophobic group, e.g., a lower allcyl or a halogen and R3g is hydrogen, or, R3~ and R37 together form a 4-7-membered heterocycle including the N
and the Ca, carbon, as defined for A above; and R4o represents a C-terminally linlced amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C-terminally linl~ed peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group.
In preferred embodiments, R2 is absent, or represents a small hydrophobic group such as a lower alkyl or a halogen.
In preferred embodiments, R3 is a hydrogen, or a small hydrophobic group such as a lower allcyl or a halogen.
In preferred embodiments, RS is a hydrogen, or a halogenated lower allcyl.
In preferred embodiments, Xl is a fluorine, and X2 and X3, if halogens, are fluorine.
Also deemed as equivalents are any compounds which can be hydrolytically converted into any of the aforementioned compounds including boronic acid esters and halides, and carbonyl equivalents including acetals, hemiacetals, lcetals, and hemilcetals, and cyclic dipeptide analogs.
Longer peptide sequences are needed for the inhibition of certain proteases and improve the specificity of the inhibition in some cases.
In preferred embodiments, the subject method utilizes, as a DPIV inhibitor, a boronic acid analogs of an amino acid. For example, the present invention contemplates the 'use of boro-prolyl derivatives in the subject method.
Exemplary boronic acid derived inhibitors of the present invention are represented by the general formula:
R1/N B~OR~2 I
OR~~
wherein Rl represents a C-terminally linlced amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C- terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group, or o s o or -S-Rg ;
Rs Rs O
R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, an allcyl, an allcenyl, an allcynyl, an aryl, -(CH~)m R7, -(CH2)m OH, -(CH~)m O-alkyl, -(CH~)m O-allcenyl, -(CH2),n O-allcynyl, -(CH2)m O-(CH~)m R7, -(CH2)1ri SH, -(CH2)m S-alkyl, -(CH~)m S-alkenyl, -(CH2)m S-allcynyl, -(CH2)m S-(CH2)m R7, iR$ II ~R8 NH2 -(CH2)m-N~R9 s -(CH2)n-C-NCR ~ -(CH2)n-NHZ-IC-NH2 O O O
-(CH2)n-C-O-R7 ~ -(CH2)n-C-alkyl ~ -(CH2)n-C-alkenyl or -(CH2)n-C-alkynyl -(CH2)n-C-(CH2)m-R7 R7 represents an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloalkenyl, or a heterocycle;
Rg and Rg each independently represent hydrogen, alkyl, allcenyl, -(CH2)m R7, -C(=O)-alkyl, -C(=O)-allcenyl, -C(=O)-allcynyl, -C(=O)-(CH2)1ri R7, or Rg and Rg taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
Rll and R12 each independently represent hydrogen, a alkyl, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or Rll and Rl~ talcen together with the O-B-O
atoms to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having fiom 5 to atoms in the ring structure;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
In other embodiments, the subject DPIV inhibitors include an aldehyde analogs of proline or prolyl derivatives. Exemplary aldehyde-derived inhibitors of the present invention are represented by the general formula:
i N ~O
R~
wherein Rl represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C- terminally linlced peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group, or O S
or -S-Rg ;
Rg represents hydrogen, a halogen, an alkyl, an allcenyl, an allcynyl, an aryl, -(CH~)ln R7, -(CH~)m OH, -(CH~)~; O-alkyl, -(CH2)m O-alkenyl, -(CH2)ln O-allcynyl, -(CH2)m O-(CH2)m R7, -(CH~)~; SH, -(CH2)m S-alkyl, -(CH2)m S-allcenyl, -(CH2)m S-allcynyl, or -(CH2)m S-(CH2)m R7, ~Ra ~ ~Ra iIH2 -(CHp)m-N~R9 , -(CH2)n-C-N~ ' R9 -(CH2)n-NHZ-C-NH2 p p O
-(CHp)n--IC-p-R7 ~ -(CH2)n-CI-alkyl ~ -(CH2)n--IC-alkenyl or -(CH2)n-C-alkynyl -(CH2)n-C-(CH2)m-R7 R7 represents an aryl, a cycloallcyl, a cycloalkenyl, or a heterocycle;
Rg and R9 each independently represent hydrogen, alkyl, allcenyl, -(CH2)ln R7, -C(=O)-alkyl, -C(=O)-alkenyl, -C(=O)-alkynyl, -C(=O)-(CH2),n R7, or Rg and Rg taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure; and m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
In yet further embodiments, the subject DPIV inhibitors are halo-methyl lcetone analogs of an amino acid. Exemplary inhibitors of this class include compounds represented by the general formula:
i ,N O
R~
X ~3 wherein Rl represents a C-terminally linlced amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C- terminally linlced peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group, or o S o . ' or -S-R6 , R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, an alkyl, an allcenyl, an allcynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m R7, -(CH~)m OH, -(CH2)m O-alkyl, -(CH2)1ri O-allcenyl, -(CH2)1ri O-allcynyl, -(CH2)1ri O-(CH~)m R7, -(CH2)1ri SH, -(CH~),ri S-allcyl, -(CH2)mS-allcenyl, -(CH2)m S-allcynyl, or -(CH2),n S-(CH2)m R7, i Rg ~ ~Rg NH2 -(CH2)m-N~ , -(CH2)n-C-N~ ' II ' R9 R9 -(CH2)n-NH2-C-NH2 p O O
, , (CH2)n-C-O-R7 -(CH2)n-IC-alkyl -(CH2)n-IC-alkenyl O O
II , or II
-(CH2)n-C-alkynyl -(CH2)n-C-(CH2)m-R7 R7 represents an aryl, a cycloallcyl, a cycloalkenyl, or a heterocycle;
Rg and Rg each independently represent hydrogen, alkyl, allcenyl, -(CH2)m R7, -C(=O)-alkyl, -C(=O)-allcenyl, -C(=O)-allcynyl, -C(=O)-(CH2)m R7, or Rg and R~
taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
Xl, X~ and Xg each represent a hydrogen or a halogen; and m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
In preferred embodiments, the DPIV inhibitor is a peptide or peptidomimetic including a prolyl group or analog thereof in the P 1 specificity position, and a nonpolar amino acid in the P2 specificity position, e.g., a nonpolar amino acid such as alanine, leucine, isoleucine, valine, proline, phenylalanine, tryptophan or methionine, or an analog thereof. For example, the DPIV inhibitor may include an Ala-Pro or Pro-Pro dipeptide sequence or equivalent thereof, and be represented in the general formulas:
Rz Rz Rz R3o W Rso-N R W
R3 ~ 3 0 or In preferred embodiments, the ring A is a 5-, 6-, or 7-membered ring, e.g., represented by the formula n -N
In preferred embodiments, R32 is a small hydrophobic group, e.g., a lower alkyl or a halogen.
In preferred embodiments, R3o represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group.
In preferred embodiments, R2 is absent, or represents a small hydrophobic group such as a lower alkyl or a halogen.
In preferred embodiments, R3 is a hydrogen, or a small hydrophobic group such as a lower alkyl or a halogen.
Another representative class of compounds for use in the subject method include peptide and peptidomimetics of (D)-Ala-(L)-Ala, e.g., preserving the diasteromeric orientation of the substituents. Such inhibitors include compounds represented by the general formula:
H
N\L/W
O Rgz wherein W represents a functional group which reacts with an active site residue of the targeted protease, as for example, -CN, -CH--NRS, I I O /Y1 ~ 15o O
-$-X1 , -PI-X1 a -BAY ~ - i -R52 or p 2 R51 R5 Rl represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C- terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group, or o s , o or -S-R5 R3 represents hydrogen or a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower allcenyl, a lower allcynyl, a carbonyl (such as a carboxyl, an ester, a formate, or a lcetone), a thiocarbonyl (such as a thioester, a thioacetate, or a thioformate), an amino, an acylamino, an amido, a cyano, a nitro, an azido, a sulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfonamido, -(CH~),ri R7, -(CH~)m OH, -(CH2)m O-lower allcyl, -(CH2)m O-lower alkenyl, -(CH~)ri O-(CH~)~; R7, -(CH~)m SH, -(CH2)m S-lower alkyl, -(CH~)m S-lower allcenyl, -(CH2)ri S-(CH2),n R7;
RS represents H, an alkyl, an alkenyl, an alkynyl, -C(Xl)(X~)X3, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH~)n-OH, -(CHZ)n-O-alkyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-allcynyl, -(CH~)n-O-(CH~)m-R7, -(CH2)n-SH, -(CH~)n-S-alkyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkenyl, -(CH~)n-S-allcynyl, -(CH~)n-S-(CH2)m-R7, -C(O)C(O)NH2, -C(O)C(O)OR'7;
R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a allcyl, a alkenyl, a allcynyl, an aryl, -(CH~)~ R7, -(CH2)m OH, -(CH~)lri O-alkyl, -(CH~)m O-allcenyl, -(CH2),n O-allcynyl, -(CH~)m O-(CH2)m R7, -(CH~)m SH, -(CH2)m S-alkyl, -(CH~),ri S-allcenyl, -(CH~)n.;
S-allcynyl, -(CH2)m S-(CH2)m R7, -(CH2)m-N~ ~ -(CH2)n'-'~C-NLRB ' NH2 , R9 ~R9 -(CH2)n'NHZ-C-NH2 O O O
-(CH2)n-C-O-R7 ~ -(CH2)n'-'C-alkyl ~ -(CH2)n-IC-alkenyl -(CH2)n-CI-alkynyl ~ or -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7 R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, arall~yl, cycloallcyl, cycloallcenyl, or heterocycle;
R'7 represents, for each occurrence, hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted allcyl, all~enyl, aryl, arallcyl, cycloallcyl, cycloallcenyl, or heterocycle;
R61 and R6~, indepedently, represent small hydrophobic groups;
Y1 and Y2', independently, are OH, or a group capable of being hydrolyzed to a hydroxyl group, including cyclic derivatives where Y1 and Y2 talcen together form a ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure (such as pinacol or the lilce), R50 represents O or S;
R51 represents N3, SHE, NHS, NO~ or OR'7;
R5~ represents hydrogen, a lower all~yl, an amine, OR'7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R51 and R52 talcen together with the phosphorous atom to wluch they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure Xl represents a halogen;
X~ and X3 each represent a hydrogen or a halogen m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
In preferred embodiments, Rl is sRao N
wherein R36 is a small hydrophobic group, e.g., a lower allcyl or a halogen and R38 is hydrogen, or, R36 and R37 together form a 4-7 membered heterocycle including the N
and the Ca, carbon, as defined for A above; and R4o represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group.
In preferred embodiments, R3 is a hydrogen, or a small hydrophobic group such as a lower allcyl or a halogen.
In prefeiTed embodiments, RS is a hydrogen, or a halogentated lower alkyl.
In preferred embodiments, Xl is a fluorine, and X2 and X3, if halogens, are fluorine.
In preferred embodiments, R~1 and Rg2, independently, represent low alkyls, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, tert-butyl or the like.
Also included are such peptidomimetics as olefins, phosphonates, aza-amino acid analogs and the like.
Another representative class of compounds for use in the method of the present invention are represented by the general formula (as described in U.S.
provisional application entitled "Methods for Regulating Glucose Metabolism, and Reagents Related Thereto" filed on Nov. 26, 2001, which is incorporated herein by reference):
R4.N~U.N W
R3 R~
wherein, Rl represents hydrogen, halogen or lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, or lower allcynyl, preferably lower alkyl such as methyl, ethyl, etc., optionally substituted by one or more small substitutents such as halogen, hydroxy, allcoxy, etc.;
R2 represents a branched lower alkyl, arallcyl, aryl, heteroaralkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or cycloallcylallcyl, preferably a bullcy hydrophobic group, such as cyclohexyl, t-butyl, etc., optionally substituted by one or more small substitutents such as halogen, hydroxy, alkoxy, etc.;
R3 represents hydrogen or an amino-protecting group, preferably hydrogen;
R4 represents hydrogen, a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, a C-terminally linlced peptide or peptide analog, an amino-protecting group, or -C- -~- .
' ~ '~ II ' O
R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a alkyl, an allcenyl, an allcynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m R7, -(CH2)m OH, -(CHa,),n O-alkyl, -(CH2)m O-allcenyl, -(CH2)m O-allcynyl, -(CHa)n,-O-(CH2),n R7, -(CH~)m SH, -(CH~,)m S-allcyl, -(CH2),n S-allcenyl, -(CHa),n S-allcynyl, -(CH2)m S-(CH2)m R7;
R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, arallcyl, cycloalkyl, cycloallcenyl, or heterocycle;
R'7 represents, for each occurrence, hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, allcenyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloallcenyl, or heterocycle;
U is absent or represents -C(=O)-, -C(=S)-, -P(=O)(OR8)-, -S(02)-, or -S(O)-, preferably -C(=O)-, -C(=S)-, or -S(02)- ;
W represents a functional group which reacts with an active site residue of the targeted protease, as for example, -CN, -CH=NR53, O O -B~Y1 -PSOR O
-P-X1 ' ~Y2 ~ ~ 52 pr ~ [~53 preferably ~Y1 O
-B, or Y2 ~ R53 Yl and Y2 are, independently, OH, or a group capable of being hydrolyzed, e.g., under physiologic conditions to a hydroxyl group, such as allcoxy, aryloxy, etc., including cyclic derivatives where Yl and Y2 are connected via a ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure (such as pinacol or the like);
R5o represents O or S;
R51 represents N3, SH, NH2, NO2 or OR'7;
R52 represents hydrogen, a lower allcyl, an amine, OR'7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R51 and Rsa taken together with the phosphorous atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
R53 represents hydrogen, an alkyl, an allcenyl, an alkynyl, -C(X1)(X2)-X3, -(CHa)m R7, -(CH2)"-OH, -(CH2)"O-allcyl, -(CHa)n O-allcenyl, -(CH2),; O-allcynyl, -(CHa)"O-(CH2)m R7, -(CH2)"SH, -(CH2)ri S-alkyl, -(CH2)n-S-allcenyl, -(CH2)"S-allcynyl, -(CH2)"S-(CH2)m R7, -C(O)C(O)NH2, -C(O)C(O)OR'7;
Xl represents a halogen, preferably a fluorine;
X2 and X3 each represent a hydrogen or a halogen, preferably a hydrogen or a fluorine;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8;
and n is ari integer in the range of 1 to 8.
In preferred embodiments, the subject method utilizes, as a DPIV inhibitor, a boronic acid analog of an amino acid. For example, the present invention contemplates the use of boro-alanine derivatives in the subject method.
Exemplary boronic acid derived inhibitors of the present invention are represented by the general formula:
O R~
/N ~ ~OR~2 R2 Rs OR~~
wherein Rl represents hydrogen, halogen or lower alkyl, lower allcenyl, or lower allcynyl, preferably lower alkyl such as methyl, ethyl, etc., optionally substituted by one or more small substitutents such as halogen, hydroxy, allcoxy, etc.;
R2 represents a branched lower alkyl, arallcyl, aryl, heteroarallcyl, heteroaryl, cycloallcyl, or cycloallcylallcyl, preferably a bulky hydrophobic group, such as cyclohexyl, t-butyl, etc., optionally substituted by one or more small substitutents such as halogen, hydroxy, allcoxy, etc.;
R3 represents hydrogen or an amino-protecting group, preferably hydrogen;
R4 represents hydrogen, a C-terminally linlced amino acid residue or amino acid analog, a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, an amino-protecting group, or -O- -C- -O-O
preferably hydrogen.
R~ represents hydrogen, a halogen, a allcyl, an allcenyl, an allcynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m R7, -(CH2)m OH, -(CHZ)m O-alkyl, -(CH2)m O-alkenyl, -(CH2)m O-allcynyl, -(CH2)n; O-(CH2),n R7, -(CH2),n SH, -(CH2),n S-alkyl, -(CH2)n; S-allcenyl, -(CH2)n; S-allcynyl, -(CHa)m S-(CH2)m R7;
R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloallcenyl, or heterocycle;
Rl i and Ria each independently represent hydrogen, an alkyl, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or Rll and Rla taken together with the O-B-O
atoms to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure; and m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
In other embodiments, the subject DPIV inhibitors include aldehyde analogs of alanine or alanyl derivatives. Exemplary aldehyde-derived inhibitors of the present invention are represented by the general formula:
i 3 O R, N H
wherein Rl represents hydrogen, halogen or lower allcyl, lower allcenyl, or lower allcynyl, preferably lower alkyl such as methyl, ethyl, etc., optionally substituted by one or more small substitutents such as halogen, hydroxy, allcoxy, etc.;
R2 represents a branched lower allcyl, aralkyl, aryl, heteroarallcyl, heteroaryl, cycloallcyl, or cycloallcylallcyl, preferably a bullcy hydrophobic group, such as cyclohexyl, t-butyl, etc., optionally substituted by one or more small substitutents such as halogen, hydroxy, allcoxy, etc.;
R3 represents hydrogen or an amino-protecting group, preferably hydrogen;
R4 represents hydrogen, a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, a C-terminally linlced peptide or peptide analog, an amino-protecting group, or - - -C- -O-' ~ '~ II ' O
preferably hydrogen.
R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a alkyl, an alkenyl, an allcynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)mR~, -(CH2)m OH, -(CH2)m O-alkyl, -(CH2)m O-allcenyl, -(CH2)m-O-allcynyl, -(CH2)m O-(CH2)m R7, -(CH2)m SH, -(CH2)m S-alkyl, -(CH2)m S-allcenyl, -(CH2)m S-alkynyl, -(CH2)n; S-(CH2)m R7;
R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, arallcyl, cycloalkyl, cycloallcenyl, or heterocycle;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
In yet fuxther embodiments, the subject DPIV inhibitors are halo-methyl ketone analogs of an amino acid. Exemplary inhibitors of this class include compounds represented by the general formula:
O R~ X1 X
R4 W ~ ~ X
wherein, Rl represents hydrogen, halogen or lower alkyl, lower allcenyl, or lower allcynyl, preferably lower allcyl such as methyl, ethyl, etc., optionally substituted by one or more small substitutents such as halogen, hydroxy, allcoxy, etc.;
R2 represents a branched lower allcyl, arallcyl, aryl, heteroarallcyl, heteroaryl, cycloallcyl, or cycloalkylalkyl, preferably a bulky hydrophobic group, such as cyclohexyl, t-butyl, etc., optionally substituted by one or more small substitutents such as halogen, hydroxy, allcoxy, etc.;
R3 represents hydrogen or an amino-protecting group, preferably hydrogen;
R4 represents hydrogen, a C-terminally linlced amino acid residue or amino acid analog, a C-terminally linlced peptide or peptide analog, an amino-protecting group, or -O- -C- -O-' ~ '~ II ' O
preferably hydrogen.
R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a alkyl, an allcenyl, an allcynyl, an aryl, -(CHZ)1R7, -(CH2)m OH, -(CH2)m O-alkyl, -(CH2)m O-allcenyl, -(CH2)m O-allcynyl, -(CHa)n; O-(CH2),n R7, -(CH2),n SH, -(CH2),n S-alkyl, -(CH2)m S-alkenyl, -(CH2)"; S-alkynyl, -(CH2),n S-(CH2),n R7;
R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, arallcyl, cycloalkyl, cycloallcenyl, or heterocycle;
Xl, X2 and X3 each represent a hydrogen or a halogen;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
In preferred embodiments, the DPIV inhibitor is a peptide or peptidomimetic including a alaninyl group or analog thereof in the P1 specificity position, and a non-naturally occurring amino acid in the P2 specificity position, or an analog thereof.
For example, the DPIV inhibitor may include an Cyclohexylglycine-Ala or t-butylglycine-Ala dipeptide sequence or equivalent thereof, and be represented in the general fomnula:
R4~N N\ /W
~(i R3 O R~
R1 represents hydrogen, halogen or lower alkyl, lower allcenyl, or lower allcynyl, preferably lower alkyl such as methyl, ethyl, etc., optionally substituted by one or more small substitutents such as halogen, hydroxy, alkoxy, etc.;
R2 represents a branched lower alkyl, arallcyl, aryl, heteroarallcyl, heteroaryl, cycloallcyl, or cycloallcylallcyl, preferably a bullcy hydrophobic group, such as cyclohexyl, t-butyl, etc., optionally substituted by one or more small substitutents such as halogen, hydroxy, allcoxy, etc.;
R3 represents hydrogen or an amino-protecting group, preferably hydrogen;
R4 represents hydrogen, a C-terminally linlced amino acid residue or amino acid analog, a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, an amino-protecting group, or -O- -C- - -' ~ '~ II ' O
preferably hydrogen.
R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a allcyl, an alkenyl, an allcynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m R7, -(CH2)m OH, -(CH2)m O-allcyl, -(CH2)m O-allcenyl, -(CH2)m O-allcynyl, -(CH2)"; O-(CHa)m-R7, -(CHa)",-SH, -(CH2)"; S-alkyl, -(CH2)m S-allcenyl, -(CH2)m S-allcynyl, -(CH2)m S-(CH2)"; R7;
R~ represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, arallcyl, cycloallcyl, cycloallcenyl, or heterocycle; W represents a functional group which reacts with an active site residue of the targeted protease, as for example, -CN, -CH--NR53, -~-X O -B Y1 P5~R52 II 1 , -P-X1 , ~ ~ I OI' Y2 ~ R53 preferably rY1 O
-B~ OI' Y~ ~ R53 .
Yl and Y2 are, independently, OH, or a group capable of being hydrolyzed, e.g., under physiologic conditions to a hydroxyl group, such as allcoxy, aryloxy, etc., including cyclic derivatives where Yl and YZ are connected via a ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure (such as pinacol or the like);
RSO represents O or S;
R51 represents N3, SH, NH2, N02 or OR'7;
R52 represents hydrogen, a lower allcyl, an amine, OR'7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R51 and R52 taken together with the phosphorous atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
R53 represents hydrogen, an alkyl, an allcenyl, an allcynyl, -C(X1)(X2)-X3, -(CH2)m R7, -(CHa)"-OH, -(CH2)"O-alkyl, -(CHa)"O-allcenyl, -(CH2)"O-allcynyl, -(CH2)"O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH~)ri SH, -(CH2)"S-alkyl, -(CH2)"S-alkenyl, -(CH2)n S-allcynyl, -(CHZ)"S-(CHZ)m-R7, -C(O)C(O)NH2, -C(O)C(O)OR'7, preferably a hydrogen, or a halogentated lower alkyl;
Xl represents a halogen, preferably a fluorine;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is am integer in the range of 1 to 8.
Another representative class of compounds for use in the subject method include peptide and peptidomimetics of (L)-Ala-(L)-Cyclohexylglycine, e.g., preserving the steric disposition of moieties. Such inhibitors include compounds represented by the general formula:
R4~N NYW
I IL
R3 O R~
wherein, RI represents hydrogen, halogen or lower alkyl, lower allcenyl, or lower allcynyl, preferably lower allcyl such as methyl, ethyl, etc., optionally substituted by one or more small substitutents such as halogen, hydroxy, allcoxy, etc.;
R2 represents a branched lower alkyl, aralkyl, aryl, heteroarallcyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or cycloalkylallcyl, preferably a bulky hydrophobic group, such as cyclohexyl, t-butyl, etc., optionally substituted by one or more small substituents such as halogen, hydroxy, alkoxy, etc.;
R3 represents hydrogen or an amino-protecting group, preferably hydrogen;
R4 represents hydrogen, a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, a C-terminally linlced peptide or peptide analog, an amino-protecting group, or -O- -C- -O-' ~ '~ II ' O
preferably hydrogen.
R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a allcyl, an allcenyl, an allcynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)1R7, -(CHa)m OH, -(CHZ)"; O-alkyl, -(CHa),n O-allcenyl, -(CHa)m 0-allcynyl, -(CH2)"; O-(CH2)m R7, -(CH2)m SH, -(CH2)m S-allcyl, -(CH2)m S-alleenyl, -(CH2),n S-alkynyl, -(CH2)m S-(CHa,)m R7;
R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, arallcyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
W represents a functional group which reacts with an active site residue of the targeted protease, as for example, -CN, -CH NR53, S X1 , -P-X1 , ~Y , t 5~ or O R51 , preferably oY1 O
-B, or Y2 ~ R53 Yl and Ya are, independently, OH, or a group capable of being hydrolyzed, e.g., under physiologic conditions to a hydroxyl group, such as allcoxy, aryloxy, etc., including cyclic derivatives where Yl and Ya are connected via a ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure (such as pinacol or the like);
R5o represents O or S;
R51 represents N3, SH, NH2, N02 or OR'7;
R52 represents hydrogen, a lower allcyl, an amine, OR'7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R51 and R52 talcen together with the phosphorous atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
R53 represents hydrogen, an allcyl, an allcenyl, an alkynyl, -C(Xl)(XZ)-X3, -(CHa),n-R7, -(CHa)"-OH, -(CH2)"-O-allcyl, -(CH2)"-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)n O-allcynyl, -(CH2)"-O-(CH2)"; R7, -(CH2)"SH, -(CHa)"S-alkyl, -(CH2)"-S-allcenyl, -(CHZ)"-S-allcynyl, -(CH2)"S-(CH2)m-R7, -C(O)C(O)NH2, -C(O)C(O)OR'7, preferably a hydrogen, or a halogentated lower alkyl;
Xl represents a halogen, preferably a fluorine;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8;
and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
Also deemed as equivalents are any compounds which can be hydrolytically converted into any of the aforementioned compounds including boronic acid esters and halides, and carbonyl equivalents including acetals, hemiacetals, ketals, and hemiketals, and cyclic dipeptide analogs.
As used herein, the definition of each expression, e.g. allcyl, m, n, etc., when it occurs more than once in any structure, is intended to be independent of its definition elsewhere in the same structure.
The pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the subject compounds include the conventional nontoxic salts or quaternary ammonium salts of the compounds, e.g., from non-toxic organic or inorganic acids. For example, such conventional nontoxic salts include those derived from inorganic acids such as hydrochloric, hydrobromic, sulfuric, sulfamic, phosphoric, nitric, and the like; and the salts prepared from organic acids such as acetic, propionic, succinic, glycolic, stearic, lactic, malic, tartaric, citric, ascorbic, palmitic, malefic, hydroxymaleic, phenylacetic, glutamic, benzoic, salicyclic, sulfanilic, 2-acetoxybenzoic, fiunaric, toluenesulfonic, methanesulfonic, ethane disulfonic, oxalic, isothionic, and the like.
2.5 The pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the present invention can be synthesized from the subject compound which contain a basic or acid moiety by conventional chemical methods. Generally, the salts are prepared by reacting the free base or acid with stoichiometric amounts or with an excess of the desired salt-forming inorganic or organic acid or base in a suitable solvent. The pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the acids of the subject compounds are also readily prepared by conventional procedures such as treating an acid with an appropriate amount of a base such as an allcahi or alhcaline earth methyl hydroxide (e.g. sodium, potassium, lithium, calcium or magnesium) or an organic base such as an amine, piperidine, pyrrolidine, benzyhamine and the hilce, or a quaternary ammonium hydroxide such as tetramethylanunonium hydroxide and the lilce.
Contemplated equivalents of the compounds described above include compounds which otherwise correspond thereto, and which have the same general properties thereof (e.g. the ability to inhibit proteolysis of GLP-1 or other peptide hormone or precursor thereof), wherein one or more simple variations of substituents axe made which do not adversely affect the efficacy of the compound in use in the contemplated method. In general, the compounds of the present invention may be prepared by the methods illustrated in the general reaction schemes as, for example, described below, or by modifications thereof, using readily available starting materials, reagents and conventional synthesis procedures. In these reactions, it is also possible to malce use of variants which axe in themselves known, but are not mentioned here.
In other embodiments of the methods, the present invention further contemplates the use of known DPIV inhibitors in the art, such as, for example, TMC-2A, TMC-2B and TMC-2C (Nonalca (1997) J. Antibiot (Tokyo) 50(8):646-652);
Lys[Z(N02)]-thiazolidide, Lys[Z(NOa)]-piperidide, and Lys[Z(N02)]-pyrrolidide (Reinhold et al. '(1997) Immunology 91(3):354-360); Phenylalanyl-pyrrolidine-2-nitrile and arginyl(PMC)-pyrrolidine-2-nitrile (Jiang et al (1997) Res. Virol.
148(4):255-266); Ala-Pro-nitrobenzoylhydroxyhamine (Tanalca et al (1997) Int J
Immunopharmacoh 19(1):15-24; Ala-PipP(OPh-4-Ch)2, Ala-ProP(OPh)2, Ala-ProP(OPh-4-Cl)a, (Boduszek et al (1994) J Med Chem 37(23):3969-3976; diprotin A
and diprotin B (Umezawa et al (1984) J Antibiotics 37:422-425); 4-amino-(2,6-dimethyhphenyl)phthalimides, 4- and 5-hydroxy-(2,6-diethylphenyl)phthalimide, and 4-hydroxy-(2,6-diisopropylphenyl)phthalimide (Shimazawa et al (1999) Bioorg Med Chem Lett 9(4):559-562). Latest developments in the search of DPIV inhibitors have also been reviewed (Augustyns et al (1999) Curr Med Chem 6(4):311-327). All of the above-cited references and publications are hereby incorporated by reference.
ii. Defi~citiovrs For convenience, before further description of the present invention, certain terms employed in the specification, examples, and appended claims are collected here.
The term "allcyl" refers to the radical of saturated aliphatic groups, including straight-chain alkyl groups, branched-chain alkyl groups, cycloallcyl (alicyclic) groups, allcyl substituted cycloallcyl groups, and cycloalkyl substituted alkyl groups.
In preferred embodiments, a straight chain or branched chain alkyl has 30 or fewer carbon atoms in its backbone (e.g., C1-C30 for straight chain, C3-C3p for branched chain), and more preferably 20 or fewer. Likewise, preferred cycloallcyls have from 3-10 carbon atoms in their ring structure, and more preferably have 5, 6 or 7 carbons in the ring structure.
Moreover, the term "allcyl" (or "lower alkyl") as used throughout the specification and claims is intended to include both "unsubstituted alkyls"
and "substituted alkyls", the latter of which refers to alkyl moieties having substituents replacing a hydrogen on one or more carbons of the hydrocarbon backbone. Such substituents can include, for example, a halogen, a hydroxyl, a carbonyl (such as a carboxyl, an ester, a formyl, or a ketone), a thiocarbonyl (such as a thioester, a thioacetate, or a thioformate), an alkoxyl, a phosphoryl, a phosphonate, a phosphinate, an amino, an amido, an amidine, an imine, a cyano, a nitro, an azido, a sulfliydryl, an allcylthio, a sulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfamoyl, a sulfonamido, a sulfonyl, a heterocyclyl, an arallcyl, or an aromatic or heteroaromatic moiety. It will be understood by those slcilled in the art that the moieties substituted on the hydrocarbon chain can themselves be substituted, if appropriate. For instance, the substituents of a substituted allcyl may include substituted and unsubstituted forms of amino, azido, imino, amido, phosphoryl (including phosphonate and phosphinate), sulfonyl (including sulfate, sulfonamido, sulfamoyl and sulfonate), and silyl groups, as well as ethers, allcylthios, carbonyls (including lcetones, aldehydes, carboxylates, and esters), -CF3, -CN
and the lilce. Exemplary substituted allcyls are described below. Cycloallcyls can be fiuther substituted with . alkyls, allcenyls, allcoxys, allcylthios, aminoallcyls, carbonyl s substituted allcyls, -CF3, -CN, and the lilce.
The term "arallcyl", as used herein, refers to an allcyl group substituted with an aryl group (e.g., an aromatic or heteroaromatic group).
The terms "allcenyl" and "alkynyl" refer to unsaturated aliphatic groups analogous in length and possible substitution to the alkyls described above, but that contain at least one double or triple bond respectively.
Unless the number of carbons is otherwise specified, "lower alleyl" as used herein means an allcyl group, as defined above, but having from one to ten carbons, more preferably from one to six carbon atoms in its backbone structure.
Likewise, "lower allcenyl" and "lower allcynyl" have similar chain lengths. Preferred alkyl groups are lower allcyls. In preferred embodiments, a substituent designated herein as allcyl is a lower allcyl.
The term "aryl" as used herein includes 5-, 6- and 7-membered single-ring aromatic groups that may include from zero to four heteroatoms, for example, benzene, pyrrole, fitran, thiophene, imidazole, oxazole, thiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine and pyrimidine, and the like. Those aryl groups having heteroatoms in the ring structure may also be referred to as "aryl heterocycles" or "heteroaromatics". The aromatic ring can be substituted at one or more ring positions with such substituents as described above, for example, halogen, azide, allcyl, arallcyl, allcenyl, allcynyl, cycloallcyl, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, sulfliydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxyl, silyl, ether, allcylthio, sulfonyl, sulfonamido, lcetorie, aldehyde, ester, heterocyclyl, aromatic or heteroaromatic moieties, -CF3, -CN, or the lilce. The term "aryl" also includes polycyclic ring systems having two or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are cormnon to two adjoining rings (the rings are "fused rings") wherein at least one of the rings is aromatic, e.g., the other cyclic rings can be cycloallcyls, cycloallcenyls, cycloallcynyls, aryls and/or heterocyclyls.
The terms "heterocyclyl" or "heterocyclic group" refer to 3- to 10-membered ring structures, more preferably 3- to 7-membered rings, whose ring structures include one to four heteroatoms. Heterocycles can also be polycycles. Heterocyclyl groups include, for example, thiophene, thianthrene, fuxan, pyran, isobenzofuran, chromene, xanthene, phenoxathiin, pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, isothiazole, isoxazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, pyrimidine, phenanthroline, phenazine, phenarsazine, phenothiazine, furazan, phenoxazine, pyrrolidine, oxolane, thiolane, oxazole, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, lactones, lactams such as azetidinones and pyrrolidinones, sultams, sultones, and the like. The heterocyclic ring can be substituted at one or more positions with such substituents as described above, as for example, halogen, alkyl, arallcyl, allcenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, vitro, sulfliydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosplunate, carbonyl, carboxyl, silyl, ether, allcylthio, sulfonyl, ketone, aldehyde, ester, a heterocyclyl, an aromatic or heteroaromatic moiety, -CF3, -CN, or the like.
The terms "polycyclyl" or "polycyclic group" refer to two or more rings (e.g., cycloallcyls, cycloallcenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls and/or heterocyclyls) in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings, e.g., the rings are "fused rings".
Rings that are joined through non-adjacent atoms are termed "bridged" rings.
Each of the rings of the polycycle can be substituted with such substituents as described above, as for example, halogen, alkyl, arallcyl, allcenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, vitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxyl, silyl, ether, alkylthio, sulfonyl, lcetone, aldehyde, ester, a heterocyclyl, an aromatic or heteroaromatic moiety, -CF3, -CN, or the like.
The term "carbocycle", as used herein, refers to an aromatic or non-aromatic ring in which each atom of the ring is carbon.
The term "heteroatom" as used herein means an atom of any element other than carbon or hydrogen. Preferred heteroatoms are nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and phosphorous.
As used herein, the term "nitro" means -N02; the term "halogen" designates -F, -Cl, -Br or -I; the term "sulfhydryl" means -SH; the term "hydroxyl" means -OH;
and the term "sulfonyl" means -SO~-.
The terms "amine" and "amino" are art recognized and refer to both unsubstituted and substituted amines, e.g., a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
'R~o R~~o -N~ or -N+ R~ o R9 Rs wherein Rg, R1 p and R' 1 p each independently represent a hydrogen, an allcyl, an allcenyl, -(CH~)m-Rg, or Rg and Rl p talcen together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocycle having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure; Rg represents an aryl, a cycloallcyl, a cycloallcenyl, a heterocycle or a polycycle; and m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8. In preferred embodiments, only one of Rg or Rlp can be a carbonyl, e.g., Rg, Rlp and the nitrogen together do not form an imide.
In even more preferred embodiments, Rg and Rl p (and optionally R' 1 p) each independently represent a hydrogen, an allcyl, an alkenyl, or -(CH~)m-Rg.
Thus, the term "allcylamine" as used herein means an amine group, as defined above, having a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl attached thereto, i.e., at least one of Rg and Rlp is an alkyl group.
The term "acylamino" is art-recognized and refers to a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
Rg N~R~11 wherein R9 is as defined above, and R' 11 represents a hydrogen, an allcyl, an allcenyl or -(CH2)m Rg, where m and Rg are as defined above.
The term "amido" is art recogiuzed as an amino-substituted carbonyl and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
,.o \N-Rio Rg wherein R9, R10 are as defined above. Preferred embodiments of the amide will not include imides which may be unstable.
The term "allcylthio" refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, having a sulfur radical attached thereto. In preferred embodiments, the "allcylthio"
moiety is represented by one of -S-alkyl, -S-alkenyl, -S-alkynyl, and -S-(CH2)m-Rg, wherein m and Rg are defined above. Representative allcylthio groups include methyltluo, ethyl thio, and the like.
The term "carbonyl" is art recognized and includes such moieties as can be represented by the general formula:
O O
or -X-5( X-R11 ~R~~ ~
wherein X is a bond or represents an oxygen or a sulfur, and Rll represents a hydrogen, am alkyl, an allcenyl, -(CH2)m-Rg or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, R' 11 represents a hydrogen, an allcyl, an allcenyl or -(CH2)m Rg, where m and Rg are as defined above. Where X is an oxygen and Rl 1 or R' 11 is not hydrogen, the formula represents an "ester". Where X is an oxygen, and Rl 1 is as defined above, the moiety is referred to herein as a carboxyl group, and particularly when Rll is a hydrogen, the formula represents a "carboxylic acid". Where X is an oxygen, and R' 11 is hydrogen, the formula represents a "formate". In general, where the oxygen atom of the above formula is replaced by sulfur, the formula represents a "thiolcarbonyl" group. Where X is a sulfur and Rl 1 or R' 11 is not hydrogen, the formula represents a "thioester." Where X is a sulfur and Rll is hydrogen, the formula represents a "thiocarboxylic acid." Where X is a sulfur and Rll' is hydrogen, the formula represents a "thioformate." On the other hand, where X
is a bond, and Rll is not hydrogen, the above formula represents a "lcetone" group.
Where X is a bond, and Rl 1 is hydrogen, the above formula represents an "aldehyde"
group.
The terms "alkoxyl" or "alkoxy" as used herein refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, having an oxygen radical attached thereto. Representative allcoxyl groups include methoxy, ethoxy, propyloxy, tert-butoxy and the lilce. An "ether" is two hydrocarbons covalently linlced by an oxygen. Accordingly, the substituent of an allcyl that renders that alkyl an ether is or resembles an allcoxyl, such as can be represented by one of -O-alkyl, -O-allcenyl, -O-allcynyl, -O-(CH2)m-Rg, where m and Rg are described above.
The term "sulfonate" is art recognized and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
_II_ II oRa1 O
in which Rq.l is an electron pair, hydrogen, alkyl, cycloallcyl, or aryl.
The term "sulfate" is art recognized and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
O
O
in which Rq.l is as defined above.
The term "sulfonamido" is art recognized and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
O S, R~11 -~i \O
in which R9 and R' 11 are as defined above.
The term "sulfamoyl" is art-recognized and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
~Rlo -S-N
O \Rs in which Rg and Rl0 are as defined above.
The terms "sulfoxido" or "sulfinyl", as used herein, refers to a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
/o -s in which Rq.q. is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, allcenyl, alkynyl, cycloallcyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, or aryl.
A "phosphoryl" can in general be represented by the formula:
-P-OR4s wherein Q1 represented S or O, and Rq.6 represents hydrogen, a lower allcyl or an aryl. When used to substitute, e.g., an allcyl, the phosphoryl group of the phosphorylallcyl can be represented by the general formula:
-Q2- i -O- Or -02- i -OR46 O R4g ~ R46 wherein Q1 represented S or O, and each Rq.6 independently represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl or an aryl, Q~ represents O, S or N. When Q1 is an S, the phosphoryl moiety is a "phosphorothioate".
A "phosphoramidite" can be represented in the general formula:
-Q2- i -O- or -QZ-P-OR4s N(Rs)R1o N(R9)R1o wherein R9 and Rl0 are as defined above, and Q2 represents O, S or N.
A "phosphonamidite" can be represented in the general formula:
-OZ- i -O- or -QZ-p-OR46 N(R9)R1p OR46 wherein R9 and Rl p are as defined above, Q~ represents O, S or N, and Rq.g represents a lower allcyl or an aryl, Q2 represents O, S or N.
A "selenoallcyl" refers to an alkyl group having a substituted seleno group attached thereto. Exemplary "selenoethers" which may be substituted on the allcyl are selected from one of -Se-alkyl, -Se-allcenyl, -Se-alkynyl, and -Se-(CH2)m-R7, m and R7 being defined above.
Analogous substitutions can be made to allcenyl and allcynyl groups to produce, for example, asninoallcenyls, aminoallcynyls, amidoallcenyls, amidoallcynyls, iminoalkenyls, iminoallcynyls, thioallcenyls, thioallcynyls, carbonyl-substituted allcenyls or alkynyls.
It will be understood that "substitution" or "substituted with" includes the implicit proviso that such substitution is in accordance with permitted valence of the substituted atom and the substituent, and that the substitution results in a stable compound, e.g., which does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, etc.
As used herein, the term "substituted" is contemplated to include all permissible substituents of organic compounds. In a broad aspect, the permissible substituents include acyclic and cyclic, branched and unbranched, carbocyclic and heterocyclic, axomatic and nonaromatic substituents of organic compounds.
Illustrative substituents include, for example, those described hereinabove.
The permissible substituents can be one or more and the same or different for appropriate organic compounds. For purposes of this invention, the heteroatoms such as nitrogen may have hydrogen substituents and/or any permissible substituents of organic compounds described herein which satisfy the valencies of the heteroatoms.
This invention is not intended to be limited in any manner by the permissible substituents of organic compounds.
A "small" substituent is one of 10 atoms or less.
By the terms "amino acid residue" and "peptide residue" is meant an amino acid or peptide molecule without the -OH of its carboxyl group. In general the abbreviations used herein for designating the amino acids and the protective groups axe based on recormnendations of the IUPAC-IUB Commission on Biochemical Nomenclature (see Biochemistry (1972) 11:1726-1732). For instance Met, Ile, Leu, Ala and Gly represent "residues"of methionine, isoleucine, leucine, alanine and glycine, respectively. By the residue is meant a radical derived from the corresponding a-amino acid by eliminating the OH portion of the carboxyl group and the H portion of the a-amino group. The term "amino acid side chain" is that part of an amino acid exclusive of the - CH(NH2)COOH portion, as defined by K. D.
Kopple, "Peptides and Amino Acids", W. A. Benjamin Inc., New Yorlc and Amsterdam, 1966, pages 2 and 33; examples of such side chains of the common amino acids are -CH2CH2SCH3 (the side chain of methionine), -CH2(CH3)-CH2CH3 (the side chain of isoleucine), -CH2CH(CH3)~ (the side chain of leucine) or H-(the side chain of glycine).
For the most part, the amino acids used in the application of this invention are those naturally occurring amino acids found in proteins, or the naturally occurring anabolic or catabolic products of such amino acids which contain amino and carboxyl groups. Particularly suitable amino acid side chains include side chains selected from those of the following amino acids: glycine, alanine, valine, cysteine, leucine, isoleucine, serine, threonine, methionine, glutamic acid, aspartic acid, glutamine, asparagine, lysine, arginine, proline, histidine, phenylalanine, tyrosine, and tryptophan, and those amino acids and amino acid analogs which have been identified as constituents of peptidylglycan bacterial cell walls.
The term ' amino acid residue further includes analogs, derivatives and congeners of any specific amino acid referred to herein, as well as C-terminal or N-terminal protected amino acid derivatives (e.g. modified with an N-terminal or C-terminal protecting group). For example, the present invention contemplates the use of amino acid analogs wherein a side chain is lengthened or shortened wlule still providing a carboxyl, amino or other reactive precursor functional group for cyclization, as well as amino acid analogs having variant side chains with appropriate functional groups). For instance, the subject compound can include an amino acid analog such as, for example, cyanoalanine, canavanine, djeu~olic acid, norleucine, 3-phosphoserine, homoserine, dihydroxy-phenylalanine, 5-hydroxytryptophan, 1-methylhistidine, 3-methylhistidine, diaminopimelic acid, ornithine, or diaminobutyric acid. Other naturally occurring amino acid metabolites or precursors having side chains which are suitable herein will be recognized by those skilled in the art and are included in the scope of the present invention.
Also included are the (D) and (L) stereoisomers of such amino acids when the structure of the amino acid admits of stereoisomeric forms. The configuration of the amino acids and amino acid residues herein are designated by the appropriate symbols (D), (L) or (DL), furthermore when the configuration is not designated the amino acid or residue can have the configuration (D), (L) or (DL). It will be noted that the structure of some of the compounds of this invention includes asymmetric carbon atoms.
It is to be understood accordingly that the isomers arising from such asymmetry are included within the scope of this invention. Such isomers can be obtained in substantially pure form by classical separation techniques and by sterically controlled synthesis. For the purposes of this application, unless expressly noted to the contrary, a named amino acid shall be construed to include both the (D) or (z) stereoisomers.
The phrase "protecting group" as used herein means substituents which protect the reactive functional group from undesirable chemical reactions. Examples of such protecting groups include esters of carboxylic acids and boronic acids, ethers of alcohols and acetals and ketals of aldehydes and ketones. For instance, the phrase "N-terminal protecting group" or "amino-protecting group" as used herein refers to various amino-protecting groups which can be employed to protect the N-terminus of an amino acid or peptide against undesirable reactions during synthetic procedures.
Examples of suitable groups include acyl protecting groups such as, to illustrate, formyl, dansyl, acetyl, benzoyl, trifluoroacetyl, succinyl and methoxysuccinyl;
aromatic urethane. protecting groups as, for example, benzyloxycarbonyl (Cbz);
and aliphatic urethane protecting groups such as t-butoxycarbonyl (Boc) or 9-Fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl (FM~C).
As noted above, certain compounds of the present invention may exist in particular geometric or stereoisomeric forms. The present invention contemplates all such compounds, including cis- and trans-isomers, R- and S-enantiomers, diastereomers, (D)-isomers, (L)-isomers, the racemic mixtures thereof, and other mixtures thereof, as falling within the scope of the invention. Additional asymmetric carbon atoms may be present in a substituent such as an allcyl group. All such isomers, as well as mixtures thereof, are intended to be included in this invention.
If, for instance, a particular enantiomer of a compound of the present invention is desired, it may be prepared by asymmetric synthesis, or by derivation with a chiral auxiliary, where the resulting diastereomeric mixture is separated and the auxiliary group cleaved to provide the pure desired enantiomers. Alternatively, where the molecule contains a basic functional group, such as amino, or an acidic functional group, such as carboxyl, diastereomeric salts are formed with an appropriate optically-active acid or base, followed by resolution of the diastereomers thus formed by fractional crystallization or chromatographic means well known in the art, amd subsequent recovery of the pure enantiomers.
For purposes of this invention, the chemical elements are identified in accordance with the Periodic Table of the Elements, CAS version, Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 67th Ed., 1986-87, inside cover. Also for purposes of this invention, the term "hydrocarbon" is contemplated to include all permissible compounds having at least one hydrogen and one carbon atom. In a broad aspect, the permissible hydrocarbons include acyclic and cyclic, branched and unbranched, carbocyclic acid heterocyclic, aromatic and nonaromatic orgaiuc compounds which can be substituted or unsubstituted.
, 20 A compound is said to have an "insulinotropic activity" if it is able to stimulate, or cause the stimulation of, the synthesis or expression of the hormone insulin.
The phrase "targeted by" refers to cells which are attacked and/or gradually destroyed by an autoimmune disease. For example, in Type I diabetes white blood cells called T lymphocytes produce immune factors called cytolcines that attaclc and gradually destroy the beta cells of the pancreas.
iii. Exem~la~y Fo~mulatiohs The inhibitors useful in the subject methods possess, in certain embodiments, the ability to lower blood glucose levels, to relieve obesity, to alleviate impaired glucose tolerance, to inhibit hepatic glucose neogenesis, to inhibit diabetic lcetoacidosis, and to lower blood lipid levels and to inhibit aldose reductase. They are thus useful for the prevention and/or therapy of hyperglycemia, obesity, hyperlipidemia, diabetic complications (including retinopathy, nephropathy, neuropathy, cataracts, coronary artery disease and arteriosclerosis) and furthermore for obesity-related hypertension and osteoporosis.
Diabetes mellitus is a disease characterized by hyperglycemia occurring from a relative or absolute decrease in insulin secretion, decreased insulin sensitivity or insulin resistance. The morbidity and mortality of this disease result from vascular, renal, and neurological complications. An oral glucose tolerance test is a clinical test used to diagnose diabetes. In an oral glucose tolerance test, a patient's physiological response to a glucose load or challenge is evaluated. After ingesting the glucose, the patient's physiological response to the glucose challenge is evaluated.
Generally, this is accomplished by determining the patient's blood glucose levels (the concentration of glucose in the patient's plasma, serum or whole blood) for several predetermined points in time.
As described in the appended examples, we demonstrate that, ih vivo, high affnuty inhibitors of DPIV are biologically active with respect to regulation of glucose metabolism. For example, a single injection of the inhibitor Pro-born-Pro (see examples for structure) was alone sufficient to improve glucose control. A
single injection of Pro-boro-Pro was also observed to potentiate the response to a subtherapeutic dose of GLP-1. We have also observed that chronic (>5 days) treatment with Pro-boro-Pro alone lowers both fasting blood sugars, and the glycemic excursion to oral glucose challenge.
As indicated above, the inhibitors useful in the subject method can be peptide-or peptidomimetic-derived inhibitors of the target proteolytic activity, or can be a non-peptide compound identified, e.g., by drug screening assays described herein.
As discussed further below, a variety of assays are available in the art for identifying potential inhibitors of DPIV and the like, as well as assessing the various biological activities (including side-effects and toxicity) of such an inhibitor.
A. Examples of peptidyl DPITl inhibito~~s In the case of DPIV inhibitors, a preferred class of inhibitors are peptidyl compounds based on the dipeptides Pro-Pro or Ala-Pro. Another preferred class of peptidyl inhibitors are compounds based on the dipeptide (D)-Ala-(L)-Ala. In many embodiments, it will be desirable to provide the peptidyl moiety as a peptidomimetic, e.g., to increase bioavailability and/or increase the serum half life relative to the equivalent peptide. For instance, a variety of peptide backbone analogs are available in the art and be readily adpated for use in the subject methods.
In an exemplary embodiment, the peptidomimetic can be derived as a retro-inverso analog of the peptide. To illustrate, certain of the subject peptides can be generated as the retro-inverso analog (shown in its unprotected state):
D N N~ ,OH
H2N L H ~ I
R' O O OH
Such retro-inverso analogs can be made according to the methods known in the art, such as that described by the Sisto et al. U.S. Patent 4,522,752. For example, the illustrated retro-inverso analog can be generated as follows. The geminal diamine corresponding to the N-terminal amino acid analogs is synthesized by treating an N-Boc-protected amino acid (having the sidechain R) with ammonia under HOBT-DCC
coupling conditions to yield amide, and then effecting a Hofmann-type rearrangement with I,I-bis-(trifluoroacetoxy)iodobenzene (TIB), as described in Radhalcrishna et al.
(1979) J. O~g. Chem. 44:1746. The product amine salt is then coupled to a side-chain protected (e.g., as the benzyl ester) N-Fmoc D-enatiomer of the second amino acid residue (e.g., having a sidechain R') under standard conditions to yield the pseudodipeptide. The Fmoc (fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl) group is removed with piperidine in dimethylformamide, and the resulting amine is trimethylsilylated with bistrimethylsilylacetamide (BSA) before condensation with suitably allcylated, side-chain protected derivative of Meldrum's acid, as described in U.S. Patent 5,061,811 to Pinori et al., to yield the retro-inverso tripeptide analog. The pseudotripeptide is then coupled with (protected) born-proline under standard conditions to give the protected tetrapeptide analog. The protecting groups are removed to release the final product, which is purified by HPLC.
In another illustrative embodiment, the peptidomimetic can be derived as a retro-enantio analog of the peptide:
HO O CHg O R
HO' B~ D N D ~
N N D N~COOR
H ~ H
O R' v Retro-enantio analogs such as this can be synthesized using D-enatiomers of commercially available D-amino acids or other amino acid analogs and standard solid-or solution-phase peptide-synthesis techniques.
In still another illustrative embodiment, trans-olefin derivatives can be made with the subject boronophenylalanine analogs. For example, an exemplary olefin analog is:
R CHg N \ N~ OOH
H2N ~ v ~ B
O R' O OH
The trans olefin analog can be synthesized according to the method of Y.K.
Shue et al. (1987) Tet~ ahed~~o~ Letter°s 28:3225.
Still another class of peptidomimetic boronophenylalanine derivatives include the phosphonate derivatives, such as:
N IPA N~ OOH
H2N ~ ~OH O ~ I
O R' O OH
The synthesis of such phosphonate derivatives can be adapted from known synthesis schemes. See, for example, Loots et al. in Peptides: Chemistry a~cd Biology, (Escom Science Publishers, Leiden, 1988, p. 118); Petrillo et al. in Peptides:
Sh°uctuy~e and Function (Proceedings of the 9th American Peptide Symposium, Pierce Chemical Co.
Roclcland, IL, 1985).
B. Non peptidyl DPITr iv~hibito~s . The pharmaceutical industry has developed a variety of different strategies for assessing millions of compounds a year as potential lead compounds based on inhibitory activity against an enzyme. DPIV and other proteolytic enzymes targeted by the subject method are amenable to the types of high throughput screening required to saanple large arrays of compounds and natural extracts for suitable inhibitors.
As an illustrative embodiment, the ability of a test agent to inhibit DPIV can be assessed using a colorimetric or fluorometric substrate, such as Ala-Pro-paranitroanilide. See US Patent 5,462,928. Moreover, DPIV can be purified, and is accordingly readily amenable for use in such high throughput formats as mufti-well plates.
Briefly, DPIV is purified from pig l~idney cortex (Berth et al. (1974) Acta Biol Med Germ 32:157; Wolf et al. (1972) Acta Bio Mes Germ 37:409) or human placenta (Puschel et al. (1982) Eur J Biochem 126:359). An illustrative reaction mixture includes SO~M sodium Hepes (pH7.8), 10~,M Ala-Pro-paranitroanilide, 6 milliunits of DPIV, and 2% (v/v) dimethylformamide in a total volume of 1.0 mL. The reaction is initiated by addition of enzyme, and formation of reaction product (paranitroanilide) in the presence and absence of a test compound can be detected photometrically, e.g., at 410 mn.
Exemplary compounds which can be screened for activity against DPIV (or other relevant enzymes) include peptides, nucleic acids, carbohydrates, small organic molecules, and natural product extract libraries, such as isolated from animals, plants, fungus and/or microbes.
C. Assays of Insulifzot~opic Activity In selecting a compound suitable for use in the subject method, it is noted that the insulinotropic property of a compound may be determined by providing that compound to animal cells, or injecting that compound into animals and monitoring the release of immunoreactive insulin (IRI) into the media or circulatory system of the animal, respectively. The presence of IRI can be detected through the use of a radioimmunoassay which can specifically detect insulin.
Nonobese diabetic (NOD) mice are a well established model of type I diabetes (IDDM). In most litters, a prediabetic (>20 weelcs) phase is observed which is characterized by pancreatic insulitis without hyperglycemia. The NOD mice can purchased from, for example, The Jaclcson Laboratories (Bar Harbor, Me.). In an exemplary embodiment, for treatment of the mice with a regimen including a DPIV
inhibitor or control, sub-orbital sinus blood samples are taken before and at some time (e.g., 60 minutes) after dosing of each animal. Blood glucose measurements can be made by any of several conventional techniques, such as using a glucose meter.
The blood glucose levels of the control and DPIV inhibitor dosed animals are compared The metabolic fate of exogenous GLP-1 can also be followed in either nondiabetic and type I diabetic subjects, and the effect of a candidate DPIV
inhibitor determined. For instance, a combination of high-pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC), specific radioimmunoassays (RIAs), and a enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA), can be used, whereby intact biologically active GLP-1 and its metabolites can be detected. See, for example, Deacon et al. (1995) Diabetes 44:1126-1131. To illustrate, after GLP-1 administration, the intact peptide can be measured using an NH2-terminally directed RIA or ELISA, while the difference in concentration between these assays and a COOH-terminal-specific RIA allowed determination of NH2-terminally truncated metabolites. Without inhibitor, subcutaneous GLP-1 is rapidly degraded in a time-dependent mamzer, forming a metabolite wluch co-elutes on HPLC with GLP-I(9-36) amide and has the same immunoreactive profile. For instance, thirty minutes after subcutaneous GLP-1 administration to diabetic patients (n = 8), the metabolite accounted for 88.5 + 1.9%
of the increase in plasma immunoreactivity determined by the COOH-terminal RIA, which was higher than the levels measured in healthy subjects (78.4 + 3:2%; n = 8; P
< 0.05). See Deacon et al., supra. Intravenously infused GLP-I was also extensively degraded.
D. Pharmaceutical Foy~mulations The inhibitors can be administered in various forms, depending on the disorder to be treated and the age, condition and body weight of the patient, as is well l~nown in the art. For example, where the compounds are to be administered orally, they may be formulated as tablets, capsules, granules, powders or syrups; or for parenteral administration, they may be formulated as injections (intravenous, intramuscular or subcutaneous), drop infusion preparations or suppositories. For application by the ophthalmic mucous membrane route, they may be formulated as eyedrops or eye ointments. These formulations can be prepared by conventional means, and, if desired, the active ingredient may be mixed with any conventional additive, such as an excipient, a binder, a disintegrating agent, a lubricant, a corrigent, a solubilizing agent, a suspension aid, an emulsifying agent or a coating agent. Although the dosage will vary depending on the symptoms, age and body weight of the patient, the nature and severity of the disorder to be treated or prevented, the route of administration and the form of the drug, in general, a daily dosage of from 0.01 to 2000 mg of the compound is recommended for an adult human patient, and this may be administered in a single dose or in divided doses.
Glucose metabolism can be altered, and symptoms associated with type I
diabetes can be decreased or eliminated, in accordance with a "timed"
administration of DPIV inhibitors wherein one or more appropriate indices for glucose metabolism and/or type I diabetes can be used to assess effectiveness of the treatment (dosage and/or timing): e.g. glucose tolerance, glucose level, insulin level, insulin sensitivity, glycosylated hemoglobin.
An effective time for administering DPIV inhibitors needs to be identified.
This can be accomplished by routine experiment as described below, using one or more groups of animals (preferably at least 5 animals per group).
In animals, insulinotropic activity by DPIV inlubitor treatment can be assessed by administering the inhibitor at a particular time of day and measuring the effect of the administration (if any) by measuring one or more indices associated with glucose metabolism, and comparing the post-treatment values of these indices to the values of the same indices prior to treatment.
The precise time of administration and/or amount of DPIV inhibitor that will yield the most effective results in terms of efficacy of treatment in a given patient will depend upon the' activity, pharmacol~inetics, and bioavailability of a particular compound, physiological condition of the patient (including age, sex, disease type and stage, general physical condition, responsiveness to a given dosage and type of medication), route of administration, etc. However, the above guidelines can be used as the basis for fine-tuning the treatment, e.g., determining the optimum time and/or amount of administration, which will require no more than routine experimentation consisting of monitoring the subject and adjusting the dosage and/or timing.
While the subject is being treated, glucose metabolism is monitored by measuring one or more of the relevant indices at predetermined times during a 24=
hour period. Treatment (amounts, times of administration and type of medication) may be adjusted (optimized) according to the results of such monitoring. The patient is periodically reevaluated to determine extent of improvement by measuring the same parameters, the first such reevaluation typically occurring at the end of four weeps from the onset of therapy, and subsequent reevaluations occurring every 4 to 8 weeks during therapy and then every 3 months thereafter. Therapy may continue for several months or even years with six months being a typical length of therapy for humans.
Adjustments to the amounts) of drugs) administered and possibly to the time of administration may be made based on these reevaluations. For example, if after 4 weeks of treatment one of the metabolic indices has not improved but at least one other one has, the dose could be increased by 1/3 without changing the time of administration.
Treatment can be initiated with smaller dosages which are less than the optimum dose of the compound. Thereafter, the dosage should be increased by small increments until the optimum effect under the circumstances is reached. For convenience, the total daily dosage may be divided and administered in portions during the day if desired.
The phrase "therapeutically effective amount" as used herein means that amount of, e.g., a DPIV inhibitor(s), which is effective for producing some desired therapeutic effect by inhibiting, for example, the proteolysis of a peptide hormone at a reasonable benefit/risl~ ratio applicable to any medical treatment.
The phrase "pharmaceutically acceptable" is employed herein to refer to those DPIV inhibitors, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings and animals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risl~
ratio.
The phrase "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" as used herein means a pharmaceutically-acceptable material, composition or vehicle, such as a liquid or.sohid filler, diluent, excipient, solvent or encapsulating material, involved in carrying or transporting the subject chemical from one organ, or portion of the body, to another organ, or portion of the body. Each carrier must be "acceptable" in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not injurious to the patient. Some examples of materials which can serve as pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers include: (1) sugars, such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; (2) starches, such as corn starch and potato starch; (3) cellulose, and its derivatives, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; (4) powdered tragacanth; (5) malt; (6) gelatin; (7) talc; (8) excipients, such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; (9) oils, such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil, safflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil and soybean oil; (10) glycols, such as propylene glycol; (11) polyols, such as glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol and polyethylene glycol; (12) esters, such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; (13) agar; (14) buffering agents, such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydroxide; (15) alginic acid; (16) pyrogen-free water;
(17) isotonic saline; (18) Ringer's solution; (19) ethyl alcohol; (20) phosphate buffer solutions; and (21) other non-toxic compatible substances employed in pharmaceutical formulations.
The term "pharmaceutically acceptable salts" refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic acid addition salts of DPIV inhibitors. These salts can be prepaxed in situ during the final isolation and purification of the DPIV
Inhibitors, or by separately reacting a purified DPIV inhibitor in its free base form with a suitable organic or inorganic acid, and isolating the salt thus formed. Representative salts include the hydrobromide, hydrochloride, sulfate, bisulfate, phosphate, nitrate, acetate, valerate, oleate, palmitate, stearate, laurate, benzoate, lactate, phosphate, tosylate, citrate, maleate, fumarate, succinate, tartrate, napthylate, mesylate, glucoheptonate, lactobionate, and laurylsulphonate salts and the like. (See, for example, Berge et al. (1977) "Pharmaceutical Salts", J. Pha~m. Sci. 66:1-19) In other cases, the DPIV inhibitor useful in the methods of the present invention may contain one or more acidic functional groups and, thus, are capable of forming pharmaceutically acceptable salts with pharmaceutically acceptable bases.
The term "pharmaceutically-acceptable salts" in these instances refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic base addition salts of a DPIV inhibitor(s).
These salts can likewise be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the DPIV inhibitor(s), or by separately reacting the purified DPIV inhibitors) in its flee acid form with a suitable base, such as the hydroxide, carbonate or bicarbonate of a pharmaceutically-acceptable metal canon, with ammonia, or with a pharmaceutically-acceptable organic primary, secondary or tertiary amine. Representative alkali or alkaline earth salts include the lithium, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and aluminum salts and the lilce. Representative organc amines useful for the formation of base addition salts include ethylamine, diethylamine, ethylenediamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, piperazine and the lilee (see, for example, Berge et al., supra).
Wetting agents, emulsifiers and lubricants, such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate, as well as coloring agents, release agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring and perfuming agents, preservatives and antioxidants can also be present in the compositions.
Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable antioxidants include: (1) water soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like; (2) oil-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), lecithin, propyl gallate, alpha-tocopherol, and the like; and (3) metal chelating agents, such as citric acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), sorbitol, tartaric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like.
Formulations useful in the methods of the present invention include those suitable for oral, nasal, topical (including buccal and sublingual), rectal, vaginal, aerosol and/or parenteral administration. The formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any methods well known in the art of pharmacy. The amount of active ingredient which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host being treated, the particular mode of administration. The amount of active ingredient which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will generally be that amount of the compound which produces a therapeutic effect.
Generally, out of one hundred per cent, this amount will range from about 1 per cent to about ninety-nine percent of active ingredient, preferably from about 5 per cent to about 70 per cent, most preferably from about 10 per cent to about 30 per cent.
Methods of preparing these formulations or compositions include the step of bringing into association a DPIV inhibitors) with the carrier and, optionally, one or more accessory ingredients. In general, the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association a DPIV inhibitor with liquid carriers, or finely divided solid carriers, or both, and then, if necessary, shaping the product.
Formulations suitable for oral administration may be in the form of capsules, cachets, pills, tablets, lozenges (using a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth), powders, granules, or as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid, or as an. oil-in-water or water-in-oil liquid emulsion, or as an elixir or syrup, or as pastilles (using an inert base, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia) and/or as mouth washes and the like, each containing a predetermined amount of a DPIV inhibitors) as an active ingredient. A compound may also be administered as a bolus, electuary or paste.
In solid dosage forms for oral administration (capsules, tablets, pills, dragees, powders, granules and the like), the active ingredient is mixed with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers, such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate, and/or any of the following: (1) fillers or extenders, such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and/or silicic acid; (2) binders, such as, for example, carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, sucrose and/or acacia; (3) humectants, such as glycerol; (4) disintegrating agents, such as agar-agax, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate; (5) solution retarding agents, such as paraffin; (6) absorption accelerators, such as quaternary ammonium compounds; (7) wetting agents, such as, for example, acetyl alcohol and glycerol monostearate; (~) absorbents, such as kaolin and bentonite clay; (9) lubricants, such a talc, calcium steaxate, magnesium stearate, solid polyethylene glycols, sodium lauryl sulfate, and mixtures thereof; and (10) coloring agents. In the case of capsules, tablets and pills, the pharmaceutical compositions may also comprise buffering agents. Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or mills sugars, as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the lilce.
A tablet may be made by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients. Compressed tablets may be prepared using binder (for example, gelatin or hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose), lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, disintegrant (for example, sodium starch glycolate or cross-linlced sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), surface-active or dispersing agent. Molded tablets may be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered peptide or peptidomimetic moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
Tablets, and other solid dosage forms, such as dragees, capsules, pills and granules, may optionally be scored or prepared with coatings and shells, such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical-formulating art.
They may also be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therein using, for example, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose in varying ' proportions to provide the desired release profile, other polymer matrices, liposomes and/or microspheres. They may be sterilized by, for example, filtration through a bacteria-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved in sterile water, or some other sterile injectable medium immediately before use. These compositions may also optionally contain opacifying agents and may be of a composition that they release the active ingredients) only, or preferentially, in a certain portion of the gastrointestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions which can be used include polymeric substances and waxes. The active ingredient can also be in micro-encapsulated form, if appropriate, with one or more of the above-described excipients.
Liquid dosage forms for oral administration include pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs. In addition to the active ingredient, the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art, such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers, such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof.
Besides inert diluents, the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, coloring, perfuming and preservative agents.
Suspensions, in addition to the active DPIV inhibitors) may contain suspending agents as, for example, ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminum metahydroxide, bentonite, agar-agar and tragacanth, and mixtures thereof.
Formulations for rectal or vaginal administration may be presented as a suppository, which may be prepared by mixing one or more DPIV inhibitors) with one or more suitable nonirritating excipients or carriers comprising, for example, cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol, a suppository wax or a salicylate, and which is solid at room temperature, but liquid at body temperature and, therefore, will melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active agent.
Formulations which are suitable for vaginal administration also include pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
Dosage forms for the topical or transdermal administration of a DPIV
inhibitors) include powders, sprays, ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, solutions, patches and inhalants. The active component may be mixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier, and with any preservatives, buffers, or propellants which may be required.
The ointments, pastes, creams and gels may contain, in addition to DPIV
° 20 inhibitor(s), excipients, such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.
Powders and sprays can contain, in addition to a DPIV inhibitor(s), excipients such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicates and polyamide powder, or mixtures of these substances. Sprays can additionally contain customary propellants, such as chlorofluorohydrocarbons and volatile unsubstituted hydrocarbons, such as butane and propane.
The DPIV inlubitor(s) can be alternatively administered by aerosol. This is ° accomplished by preparing an aqueous aerosol, liposomal preparation or solid particles containing the compound. A nonaqueous (e.g., fluorocarbon propellant) suspension could ~ be used. Sonic nebulizers are preferred because they minimize exposing the agent to shear, which can result in degradation of the compound.
Ordinarily, an aqueous aerosol is made by formulating an aqueous solution or suspension of the agent together with conventional pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and stabilizers. The carriers and stabilizers vary with the requirements of the particular compound, but typically include nonionic surfactants (Tweens, Pluronics, or polyethylene glycol), innocuous proteins lilce serum albumin, sorbitan esters, oleic acid, lecithin, amino acids such as glycine, buffers, salts, sugars or sugar alcohols.
Aerosols generally are prepared from isotonic solutions.
Transdermal patches have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of a DPIV inhibitors) to the body. Such dosage forms can be made by dissolving or dispersing the agent in the proper medium. Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the peptidomimetic across the slcin. The rate of such flux can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or dispersing the peptidomimetic in a polymer matrix or gel.
Ophthalmic formulations, eye ointments, powders, solutions and the lilce, are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention.
Pharmaceutical compositions of this invention suitable for parenteral administration comprise one or more DPIV inhibitors) in combination with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable sterile isotonic aqueous or nonaqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions, or sterile powders which may be reconstituted into sterile injectable solutions or dispersions just prior to use, which may contain antioxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient or suspending or thickening agents.
Examples of suitable aqueous and nonaqueous carriers which may be employed in the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention include water, ethanol, polyols (such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils, such as olive oil, and injectable organic esters, such as ethyl oleate. Proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of coating materials, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersions, and by the use of surfactants.
These compositions may also contain adjuvants such as preservatives, wetting agents, emulsifying agents and dispersing agents. Prevention of the action of microorganisms may be ensured by the inclusion of various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, paraben, chlorobutanol, phenol sorbic acid, and the lilce. It may also be desirable to include isotonic agents, such as sugars, sodium chloride, and the like into the compositions. In addition, prolonged absorption of the injectable pharmaceutical form may be brought about by the inclusion of agents which delay absorption such as aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
In some cases, in order to prolong the effect of a drug, it is desirable to slow the absorption of the drug from subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. This may be accomplished by the use of a liquid suspension of crystalline or amorphous material having poor water solubility. The rate of absorption of the drug then depends upon its rate of dissolution which, in turn, may depend upon crystal size and crystalline form.
Alternatively, delayed absorption of a parenterally-administered drug form is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the drug in an oil vehicle.
Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsule matrices of DPIV
inhibitors) in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide.
Depending on the ratio of drug to polymer, and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of drug release can be controlled. Examples of other biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the ~ drug in liposomes or microemulsions which are compatible with body tissue.
i~hen the DPIV inhibitors) of the present invention are administered as pharmaceuticals, to humans and animals, they can be given per se or as a pharmaceutical composition containing, for example, 0.1 to 99.5% (more preferably, 0.5 to 90%) of active ingredient in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
The preparations of agents may be given orally, parenterally, topically, or rectally. They are of course given by forms suitable for each administration route. For example, they are administered in tablets or capsule form, by injection, inhalation, eye lotion, ointment, suppository, etc. administration by injection, infusion or inhalation;
topical by lotion or ointment; and rectal by suppositories. Oral administration is preferred.
The phrases "paxenteral administration" and "administered parenterally" as used herein means modes of administration other than enteral and topical administration, usually by injection, and includes, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarterial, intrathecal, intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intraarticulare, subcapsular, subarachnoid, intraspinal and intrasternal injection and infusion.
The phrases "systemic administration," "administered systemically,"
"peripheral administration" and "administered peripherally" as used herein mean the administration of a DPIV inhibitor, drug or other material other than directly into the central nervous system, such that it enters the patient's system and, thus, is subject to metabolism and other lilce processes, for example, subcutaneous administration.
These DPIV inhibitors) may be administered to humans and other animals for therapy by any suitable route of administration, including orally, nasally, as by, for example, a spray, rectally, intravaginally, parenterally, intracisternally and topically, as by powders, ointments or drops, including buccally and sublingually.
Regardless of the route of administration selected, the DPIV inhibitor(s), which may be used in a suitable hydrated form, and/or the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention, are formulated into pharmaceutically-acceptable dosage forms by conventional methods lcnown to those of skill in the art.
Actual dosage levels of the active ingredients in the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention may be varied so as to obtain an amount of the active ingredient which is effective to achieve the desired therapeutic response for a particular patient, composition, and mode of administration, without being toxic to the patient.
E. Co~joi~t administratioh Another aspect of the invention provides a conjoint therapy wherein one or more other therapeutic agents are administered with the protease inhibitor.
Such conjoint treatment may be achieved by way of the simultaneous, sequential or separate dosing of the individual components of the treatment.
In one embodiment, a DPIV inhibitor is conjointly administered with immunosuppressive agents, such as, for example, cyclosporine; cyclosporine in conjunction with either azathioprine, steroids, or both; FI~506 tacrolimus (Prograf); or mycophenolate mofetil (Cellcept).
iv. Business Methods One aspect of the present invention relates to a lcit comprising compounds as described herein, such as DPIV inhibitors, for treatment or prevention of autoimmune disorders, such as Type 1 diabetes, septic shock, multiple sclerosis, IBD or Crohn's disease in a patient, preferably a human, and in association with instructions (written and/or pictorial) describing the use of the formulation for treatment or prevention of autoimmmle disorders, such as Type 1 diabetes, septic shock, multiple sclerosis, IBD
or Crohn's disease, and optionally, warnings of possible side effects and drug-drug or drug-food interactions.
The invention further contemplates a method for conducting a pharmaceutical business, comprising: (a) manufacturing a pharmaceutical prepaxation comprising a sterile pharmaceutical excipient and compounds as described herein, such as DPIV
inhibitors; and (b) marketing (e.g., providing promotional and/or informative presentations (such as displays, telemarlceting, and lectures), products (such as trial samples of the preparation), and/or documentation (including leaflets, pamphlets, websites, posters, etc.)) to healthcare providers, such as doctors, hospitals, clinics, etc., a benefit of using the pharmaceutical preparation for treatment or prevention of autoimmune disorders, such as Type 1 diabetes, septic shoclc, multiple sclerosis, IBD
or Crohn's disease.
A~iother aspect of the invention provides for a method for conducting a pharmaceutical business, comprising: (a) providing a distribution networlc for selling the pharmaceutical composition comprising a sterile pharmaceutical excipient and compounds as described herein, such as DPIV Inhibitors; and (b) providing instruction material to patients or physicians for using the pharmaceutical composition for treatment or prevention of autoimmune disorders, such as Type 1 diabetes, septic shock, multiple sclerosis, IBD or Crohn's disease.
Yet another aspect of the invention provides for a method for conducting a pharmaceutical business, comprising: (a) determining an appropriate pharmaceutical preparation and dosage of a compounds as described herein, such as DPIV
inhibitors for treatment or prevention of autoimmune disorders, such as Type 1 diabetes, septic shock, multiple sclerosis, IBD or Crohn's disease; (b) conducting therapeutic profiling of the pharmaceutical preparation for efficacy and toxicity in animals; (c) providing a distribution network for selling a pharmaceutical composition having an acceptable therapeutic profile; and, optionally, (d) providing a sales group for marketing the preparation to healthcare providers.
Exemplification The invention now being generally described, it will be more readily understood by reference to the following examples which are included merely for purposes of illustration of certain aspects and embodiments of the present invention, and are not intended to limit the invention.
Exafnple 1: Synthesis of Bo~~oP~oli~ce Referring to Figure 1, the starting compound I is prepared essentially by the procedure of Matteson et al. (Organometallics 3:1284, 1984), except that a pinacol ester is substituted for the pinanediol ester. Similar compounds such as boropipecolic acid and 2-azetodine boronic acid can be prepared by malting the appropriate selection of starting material to yield the pentyl and propyl analogs of compound I.
Further, Cl can be substituted for Br in the formula, and other diol protecting groups can be substituted for pinacol in the formula, e.g., 2, 3-butanediol and alphapinanediol.
Compound II is prepared by reacting compound I with [(CH3)03Si]~N-Li+ . In this reaction hexamethyldisilazane is dissolved in tetrahydrofuran and an equivalent of n-butyllithium added at -78°C After warming to room temperature (20°C) and cooling to -78°C, an equivalent of compound I is added in tetrahydrofuran. The . 10 mixture is allowed to slowly come to room temperature and to stir overnight. The alpha-bis[trimethylsilane]-protected amine is isolated by evaporating solvent and adding hexane under anhydrous conditions. Insoluble residue is removed by filtration under a nitrogen blanket, yielding a hexane solution of compound II.
Compound III, the N-trimethysilyl protected form of boroProline is obtained by the thermal cyclization of compound II during the distillation process in which compound II is heated to 100-150°C and distillate is collected which boils 66-62°C at 0.06-0.10 mm pressure.
Compound IV, boroProline-pinacol hydrogen chloride, is obtained by treatment of compound III with HCl:dioxane. Excess HCl and by-products are removed by trituration with ether. The final product is obtained in a high degree of purity by recrystallization from ethyl acetate.
The boroProline esters can also be obtained by treatment of the reaction mixture obtained in the preparation of compound II with anhydrous acid to yield 1 amino-4-bromobutyl boronate pinacol as a salt. Cyclization occurs after neutralizing the salt with base and heating the reaction.
Example 2: Preparation of bo~oP~oline pi~cacol The intermediate, 4-Bromo-1-chlorobutyl boronate pinacol, was prepared by the method in Matteson et al. (Organometallics 3:1284, 1984) except that conditions were modified for large scale preparations and pinacol was substituted for the pinanediol protecting group.
3-bromopropyl boronate pinacol was prepared by hydrogenboronation of allyl bromide (173 ml, 2.00 moles) with catechol borane (240 ml, 2.00 moles).
Catechol borane was added to allyl bromide and the reaction heated for 4 hours at 100°C under a nitrogen atmosphere. The product, 3-bromopropyl boronate catechol (bp 95-102°C, 0.25 mm), was isolated in a yield of 49°1° by distillation. The catechol ester (124 g, 0.52 moles) was ~transesterified with pinacol (61.5 g, 0.52 moles) by mixing the component in 50 ml of THF and allowing them to stir for 0.5 hours at 0°C and 0.5 hours at room temperature. Solvent was removed by evaporation and 250 ml of hexane added. Catechol was removed as a crystalline solid. Quantitative removal was achieved by successive dilution to 500 ml and to 1000 ml with hexane and removing crystals at each dilution. Hexane was evaporated and the product distilled to yield 177g (bp 60-64°C, 0.35 mm).
4-Bromo-1-chlorobutyl b0ronate pinacol was prepared by homologation of the corresponding propyl boronate. Methylene chloride (50.54 ml, 0.713 moles) was dissolved in 500 ml of THF, 1.54N n-butyllithium in hexane (480 ml, 0.780 moles) was slowly added at -100°C. 3-Bromopropyl boronate pinacol (178 g, 0.713 moles) was dissolved in 500 ml of THG, cooled to the freezing point of the solution, and added to the reaction mixture. Zinc chloride (54.4 g, 0.392 moles) was dissolved in 250 ml of THG, cooled to 0°C, and added to the reaction mixture in several portions.
The reaction was allowed to slowly warm to room temperature and to stir overnight.
Solvent was evaporated and the residue dissolved in hexane (1 liter) and washed with water (1 liter). Insoluble material was discarded. After drying over anhydrous magnesium sulfate and filtering, solvent was evaporated. The product was distilled to yield 147 g (bp 110-112°C, 0.200 mm).
N-Trimethylsilyl-boroProline pinacol was prepared first by dissolving hexamethyldisilizane (20.0 g, 80.0 mmoles) in 30 ml of THF, cooling the solution to -78°C, and adding 1.62N n-butyllithium in hexane (49.4 ml, 80.0 mmoles).
The solution was allowed to slowly warm to room temperature. It was recooled to -78°C.
and 4-bromo-1-chlorobutyl boronate pinacol (23.9 g, 80.0 mmoles) added in 20 ml of THF. The mixture was allowed to slowly warm to room temperature and to stir overnight. Solvent was removed by evaporation and dry hexane (400 ml) added to yield a precipitant which was removed by filbration under a nitrogen atmosphere. The filtrate was evaporated and the residue distilled, yielding 19.4 g of the desired product (bp 60-62°G, 0.1-0.06 mm).
H-boroProline-pinacol.HC1 (boroProline-pinacol.HC1) was prepared by cooling N-trimethylsilyl-boroProline pinacol (16.0 g, 61.7 mmoles) to -78°C and adding 4N HCL:dioxane 46 ml, 185 mmoles). The mixture was stirred 30 minutes at -78°C and 1 hour at room temperature. Solvent was evaporated and the residue triturated with ether to yield a solid. The crude product was dissolved in chloroform and insoluble material removed by filtration. The solution was evaporated and the product crystallized from ethyl acetate to yield 11.1 g of the desired product (mp 156.5-157°C).
Example 3: Syfzthesis of bo~oProlihe Peptia'es General methods of coupling of N-protected peptides and amino acids with suitable side-chain protecting groups to H-boroProline-pinacol are applicable.
When needed, side-chain protecting and N-terminal protecting groups can be removed by treatment with anhydrous HCI, HBr, trifluoroacetic acid, or by catalytic hydrogenation. These procedures are known to those slcilled in the art of peptide synthesis.
The mixed anhydride procedure of Anderson et al. (J. Am. Chem. Soc.
89:5012, 1984) is preferred for peptide coupling. Referring again to Figure 1, the mixed anhydride of an N-protected amino acid or a peptide is prepared by dissolving the peptide in tetrahydrofuran and adding one equivalent of N-methylmoipholine. The solution is cooled to -20°C and an equivalent of isobutyl chloroformate is added.
After 5 minutes, this mixture and one equivalent of triethylamine (or other sterically hindered base) are added to a solution of H-boroPro-pinacol dissolved in either cold chloroform of tetrahydrofuran.
The reaction mixture is routinely stirred for one hour at -20°C and 1 to 2 hours at room temperature (20°C). Solvent is removed by evaporation, and the residue is dissolved in ethyl acetate. The organic solution is washed with 0.20N
hydrochloric acid, 5% aqueous sodium bicarbonate, and saturated aqueous sodium chloride.
The organic phase is dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered, and evaporated.
Products are purified by either silica gel chromatography or gel permeation chromatography using Sephadex TM LH-20 and methanol as a solvent.
Previous studies have shown that the pinacol protecting group can be removed in situ by preincubation in phosphate buffer prior to running biological experiments (Fettner et al., J. Biol. Chem. 259:15106, 1984). Several other methods are also applicable for removing pinacol groups from peptides, including boroProline, and characterizing the final product. First, the peptide can be treated with diethanolamine to yield the corresponding diethanolamine boronic acid ester, which can be readily hydrolyzed by treatment with aqueous acid or a sulfonic acid substituted polystyrene resin as described in Fettner et al. (supra). Both pinacol and pinanediol protecting groups can be removed by treating with BC13 in methylene chloride as described by Finder et al. (J. Med. Chem. 28:1917). Finally, the free boronic acid can be converted to the difluoroboron derivative (-BF2) by treatment with aqueous HF as described by Finder et al. (supra).
Similarly, different ester groups can be introduced by reacting the free boronic acid with various di-hydroxy compounds (for example, those containing heteroatoms such as S or N) in an inert solvent.
Example 4: Pr~epay~atio~ of H Ala-bo~oPro Boc-Ala-boroPro was prepared by mixed anhydride coupling of the N-Boc-protected alanine and H-boroPro prepared as described above. H-Ala-boroPro (Ala-boroPro) was prepared by removal of the Boc protecting group at 0°C in 3.5 molar excess of 4N HCl-dioxane. The coupling and debloclcing reactions were performed by standard chemical reaction. Ala-boroPro has a Ki for DP-IV of in the nanomolar range. Boc-blocked Ala-boroPro has no affinity for DP-IV.
The two diastereomers of Ala-boroPro-pinacol, L-Ala-D-boroPro-pinacol and L-Ala-L-boroPro-pinacol, can be partially separated by silica gel chromatography with 20% methanol in ethyl acetate as eluant. The early fraction appears by NMR
analysis to be 95% enriched in one isomer. Because this fraction has more inhibits DP-IV to a greater extent than later fractions (at equal concentrations) it is probably enriched in the L-boroPro (L-Ala-L-boroPro-pinacol) isomer.
Example 5: Synthesis of Cyclohexylglycine bof°oAla Referring to Figure 1, a solution of 515 mg (2.00 mmol) of Boc-L-2-(cyclohexyl)glycine 1 CChem-Impex International), 587 mg (2.26 mmol) of HCl.boroAla pinane 2, 332 mg ( 2.46 mmol) of HOBT, and 671 ~L (4.84 mmol) of triethylamine in 6 mL of anlrydrous DMF was treated with 498 mg ( 2.60 mmol) of EDC, and the resulting solution stirred at room temperature under argon for 18 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with a 200 mL of 10% aqueous citric acid and the resulting mixture extracted with 2 x 100 mL of ethyl acetate. The combined extracts were washed with brine, dried (MgS04), filtered, and concentrated to give a clear oil.
The crude oil was chromatographed over silica gel with ethyl acetate/hexane to give the product ester as a clear oil. The oil was then dissolved in hydrogen chloride in diethyl ether (1.0 M solution, 25 mL) and stirred for 48 hours at room temperature.
The mixture was evaporated to dryness in vacuo and redissolved in 25 mL
phenylboronic acid solution (244 mg, 2 mmol) at pH 2 (0.01 N HCl) and ether (25 mL). After stirring for 30 min, the ether layer was removed and replaced with fresh ether (25 mL). This step was repeated for four times. The aqueous phase was then lyophilized and purified by HPLC to afford 170 mg (37%) of the target compound 3.
Example 6: DPIV Assays on Serum Samples f~onz Rats Experiments show that DPIV enzyme activity was significantly decreased in rats treated with Cyclohexylglycine-boroAla. See Figure 7. Four rats were used in this experiment: two females (#3 and #9) and two males (#10 and #11). Blood and plasma samples were collected from rats 1 hour after being treated with Cyclohexylglycine-boroAla. The collected serum samples were evaluated for DPPIV activity of Cyclohexylglycine-boroAla as follows:
1. 2 mg of Ala-Pro-paranitroanalide (substrate) was dissolved in 20 ml 0.1 M
HEPES pH 8, 0.14 M NaCI (buffer).
2. Serum samples were diluted into substrate solution in the wells of a microtiter plate. For each sample, lOuL of serum was diluted into 150 ~L of substrate.
3. A reading of the A410 in each well was recorded immediately after the dilution of serum into substrate, and again after approximately 1 hour. The time of data acquisition for each reading is recorded in the data file by the microplate reader software.
The rate of absorbance change was obtained by subtracting the first reading from the second and dividing by the reaction time to give DeltaA410/hr. The DPIV
activity was plotted in units of DeltaA410 hr'1 ~,L'1.
Example 7: Incidence of Diabetes ih NOD mice upovc t~°eatme~ct with DPIV I~hibito~s The experiment was started on 8-10 week old NOD mice. The mice were lcept under VAF/SPF conditions and fed everyday with either Val-boro-Pro (0.034 mg/lcg) or Cyclohexyl-boro-Ala (0.34 mg/lcg) for 60 days and then observed for the development of spontaneous diabetes. The mice were tested for the excretion of sugar in urine and considered positive for diabetes when sugar was detected in the urine.
The graph shows cumulative incidence of Diabetes over time (Figure 5). One of the interesting features of the NOD mice treated with Val-boro-Pro was that some of the mice that shotwed signs of diabetes got better and recovered. At the end of the experiment, the mice in Val-born-Pro group not only had low incidence of Diabetes (Figure 6) but also showed generally good health compared to the other groups.
All of the above-cited references and publications are hereby incorporated by reference.
Equivale~zts Those slcilled in the art will recognize, or be able to ascertain using no more than routine experimentation, many equivalents to the specific embodiments of the invention described herein. Such equivalents are intended to be encompassed by the following claims.
R2 represents a branched lower allcyl, arallcyl, aryl, heteroarallcyl, heteroaryl, cycloallcyl, or cycloalkylalkyl, preferably a bulky hydrophobic group, such as cyclohexyl, t-butyl, etc., optionally substituted by one or more small substitutents such as halogen, hydroxy, allcoxy, etc.;
R3 represents hydrogen or an amino-protecting group, preferably hydrogen;
R4 represents hydrogen, a C-terminally linlced amino acid residue or amino acid analog, a C-terminally linlced peptide or peptide analog, an amino-protecting group, or -O- -C- -O-' ~ '~ II ' O
preferably hydrogen.
R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a alkyl, an allcenyl, an allcynyl, an aryl, -(CHZ)1R7, -(CH2)m OH, -(CH2)m O-alkyl, -(CH2)m O-allcenyl, -(CH2)m O-allcynyl, -(CHa)n; O-(CH2),n R7, -(CH2),n SH, -(CH2),n S-alkyl, -(CH2)m S-alkenyl, -(CH2)"; S-alkynyl, -(CH2),n S-(CH2),n R7;
R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, arallcyl, cycloalkyl, cycloallcenyl, or heterocycle;
Xl, X2 and X3 each represent a hydrogen or a halogen;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
In preferred embodiments, the DPIV inhibitor is a peptide or peptidomimetic including a alaninyl group or analog thereof in the P1 specificity position, and a non-naturally occurring amino acid in the P2 specificity position, or an analog thereof.
For example, the DPIV inhibitor may include an Cyclohexylglycine-Ala or t-butylglycine-Ala dipeptide sequence or equivalent thereof, and be represented in the general fomnula:
R4~N N\ /W
~(i R3 O R~
R1 represents hydrogen, halogen or lower alkyl, lower allcenyl, or lower allcynyl, preferably lower alkyl such as methyl, ethyl, etc., optionally substituted by one or more small substitutents such as halogen, hydroxy, alkoxy, etc.;
R2 represents a branched lower alkyl, arallcyl, aryl, heteroarallcyl, heteroaryl, cycloallcyl, or cycloallcylallcyl, preferably a bullcy hydrophobic group, such as cyclohexyl, t-butyl, etc., optionally substituted by one or more small substitutents such as halogen, hydroxy, allcoxy, etc.;
R3 represents hydrogen or an amino-protecting group, preferably hydrogen;
R4 represents hydrogen, a C-terminally linlced amino acid residue or amino acid analog, a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, an amino-protecting group, or -O- -C- - -' ~ '~ II ' O
preferably hydrogen.
R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a allcyl, an alkenyl, an allcynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m R7, -(CH2)m OH, -(CH2)m O-allcyl, -(CH2)m O-allcenyl, -(CH2)m O-allcynyl, -(CH2)"; O-(CHa)m-R7, -(CHa)",-SH, -(CH2)"; S-alkyl, -(CH2)m S-allcenyl, -(CH2)m S-allcynyl, -(CH2)m S-(CH2)"; R7;
R~ represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, arallcyl, cycloallcyl, cycloallcenyl, or heterocycle; W represents a functional group which reacts with an active site residue of the targeted protease, as for example, -CN, -CH--NR53, -~-X O -B Y1 P5~R52 II 1 , -P-X1 , ~ ~ I OI' Y2 ~ R53 preferably rY1 O
-B~ OI' Y~ ~ R53 .
Yl and Y2 are, independently, OH, or a group capable of being hydrolyzed, e.g., under physiologic conditions to a hydroxyl group, such as allcoxy, aryloxy, etc., including cyclic derivatives where Yl and YZ are connected via a ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure (such as pinacol or the like);
RSO represents O or S;
R51 represents N3, SH, NH2, N02 or OR'7;
R52 represents hydrogen, a lower allcyl, an amine, OR'7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R51 and R52 taken together with the phosphorous atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
R53 represents hydrogen, an alkyl, an allcenyl, an allcynyl, -C(X1)(X2)-X3, -(CH2)m R7, -(CHa)"-OH, -(CH2)"O-alkyl, -(CHa)"O-allcenyl, -(CH2)"O-allcynyl, -(CH2)"O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH~)ri SH, -(CH2)"S-alkyl, -(CH2)"S-alkenyl, -(CH2)n S-allcynyl, -(CHZ)"S-(CHZ)m-R7, -C(O)C(O)NH2, -C(O)C(O)OR'7, preferably a hydrogen, or a halogentated lower alkyl;
Xl represents a halogen, preferably a fluorine;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is am integer in the range of 1 to 8.
Another representative class of compounds for use in the subject method include peptide and peptidomimetics of (L)-Ala-(L)-Cyclohexylglycine, e.g., preserving the steric disposition of moieties. Such inhibitors include compounds represented by the general formula:
R4~N NYW
I IL
R3 O R~
wherein, RI represents hydrogen, halogen or lower alkyl, lower allcenyl, or lower allcynyl, preferably lower allcyl such as methyl, ethyl, etc., optionally substituted by one or more small substitutents such as halogen, hydroxy, allcoxy, etc.;
R2 represents a branched lower alkyl, aralkyl, aryl, heteroarallcyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or cycloalkylallcyl, preferably a bulky hydrophobic group, such as cyclohexyl, t-butyl, etc., optionally substituted by one or more small substituents such as halogen, hydroxy, alkoxy, etc.;
R3 represents hydrogen or an amino-protecting group, preferably hydrogen;
R4 represents hydrogen, a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, a C-terminally linlced peptide or peptide analog, an amino-protecting group, or -O- -C- -O-' ~ '~ II ' O
preferably hydrogen.
R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a allcyl, an allcenyl, an allcynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)1R7, -(CHa)m OH, -(CHZ)"; O-alkyl, -(CHa),n O-allcenyl, -(CHa)m 0-allcynyl, -(CH2)"; O-(CH2)m R7, -(CH2)m SH, -(CH2)m S-allcyl, -(CH2)m S-alleenyl, -(CH2),n S-alkynyl, -(CH2)m S-(CHa,)m R7;
R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, arallcyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
W represents a functional group which reacts with an active site residue of the targeted protease, as for example, -CN, -CH NR53, S X1 , -P-X1 , ~Y , t 5~ or O R51 , preferably oY1 O
-B, or Y2 ~ R53 Yl and Ya are, independently, OH, or a group capable of being hydrolyzed, e.g., under physiologic conditions to a hydroxyl group, such as allcoxy, aryloxy, etc., including cyclic derivatives where Yl and Ya are connected via a ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure (such as pinacol or the like);
R5o represents O or S;
R51 represents N3, SH, NH2, N02 or OR'7;
R52 represents hydrogen, a lower allcyl, an amine, OR'7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R51 and R52 talcen together with the phosphorous atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
R53 represents hydrogen, an allcyl, an allcenyl, an alkynyl, -C(Xl)(XZ)-X3, -(CHa),n-R7, -(CHa)"-OH, -(CH2)"-O-allcyl, -(CH2)"-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)n O-allcynyl, -(CH2)"-O-(CH2)"; R7, -(CH2)"SH, -(CHa)"S-alkyl, -(CH2)"-S-allcenyl, -(CHZ)"-S-allcynyl, -(CH2)"S-(CH2)m-R7, -C(O)C(O)NH2, -C(O)C(O)OR'7, preferably a hydrogen, or a halogentated lower alkyl;
Xl represents a halogen, preferably a fluorine;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8;
and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
Also deemed as equivalents are any compounds which can be hydrolytically converted into any of the aforementioned compounds including boronic acid esters and halides, and carbonyl equivalents including acetals, hemiacetals, ketals, and hemiketals, and cyclic dipeptide analogs.
As used herein, the definition of each expression, e.g. allcyl, m, n, etc., when it occurs more than once in any structure, is intended to be independent of its definition elsewhere in the same structure.
The pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the subject compounds include the conventional nontoxic salts or quaternary ammonium salts of the compounds, e.g., from non-toxic organic or inorganic acids. For example, such conventional nontoxic salts include those derived from inorganic acids such as hydrochloric, hydrobromic, sulfuric, sulfamic, phosphoric, nitric, and the like; and the salts prepared from organic acids such as acetic, propionic, succinic, glycolic, stearic, lactic, malic, tartaric, citric, ascorbic, palmitic, malefic, hydroxymaleic, phenylacetic, glutamic, benzoic, salicyclic, sulfanilic, 2-acetoxybenzoic, fiunaric, toluenesulfonic, methanesulfonic, ethane disulfonic, oxalic, isothionic, and the like.
2.5 The pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the present invention can be synthesized from the subject compound which contain a basic or acid moiety by conventional chemical methods. Generally, the salts are prepared by reacting the free base or acid with stoichiometric amounts or with an excess of the desired salt-forming inorganic or organic acid or base in a suitable solvent. The pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the acids of the subject compounds are also readily prepared by conventional procedures such as treating an acid with an appropriate amount of a base such as an allcahi or alhcaline earth methyl hydroxide (e.g. sodium, potassium, lithium, calcium or magnesium) or an organic base such as an amine, piperidine, pyrrolidine, benzyhamine and the hilce, or a quaternary ammonium hydroxide such as tetramethylanunonium hydroxide and the lilce.
Contemplated equivalents of the compounds described above include compounds which otherwise correspond thereto, and which have the same general properties thereof (e.g. the ability to inhibit proteolysis of GLP-1 or other peptide hormone or precursor thereof), wherein one or more simple variations of substituents axe made which do not adversely affect the efficacy of the compound in use in the contemplated method. In general, the compounds of the present invention may be prepared by the methods illustrated in the general reaction schemes as, for example, described below, or by modifications thereof, using readily available starting materials, reagents and conventional synthesis procedures. In these reactions, it is also possible to malce use of variants which axe in themselves known, but are not mentioned here.
In other embodiments of the methods, the present invention further contemplates the use of known DPIV inhibitors in the art, such as, for example, TMC-2A, TMC-2B and TMC-2C (Nonalca (1997) J. Antibiot (Tokyo) 50(8):646-652);
Lys[Z(N02)]-thiazolidide, Lys[Z(NOa)]-piperidide, and Lys[Z(N02)]-pyrrolidide (Reinhold et al. '(1997) Immunology 91(3):354-360); Phenylalanyl-pyrrolidine-2-nitrile and arginyl(PMC)-pyrrolidine-2-nitrile (Jiang et al (1997) Res. Virol.
148(4):255-266); Ala-Pro-nitrobenzoylhydroxyhamine (Tanalca et al (1997) Int J
Immunopharmacoh 19(1):15-24; Ala-PipP(OPh-4-Ch)2, Ala-ProP(OPh)2, Ala-ProP(OPh-4-Cl)a, (Boduszek et al (1994) J Med Chem 37(23):3969-3976; diprotin A
and diprotin B (Umezawa et al (1984) J Antibiotics 37:422-425); 4-amino-(2,6-dimethyhphenyl)phthalimides, 4- and 5-hydroxy-(2,6-diethylphenyl)phthalimide, and 4-hydroxy-(2,6-diisopropylphenyl)phthalimide (Shimazawa et al (1999) Bioorg Med Chem Lett 9(4):559-562). Latest developments in the search of DPIV inhibitors have also been reviewed (Augustyns et al (1999) Curr Med Chem 6(4):311-327). All of the above-cited references and publications are hereby incorporated by reference.
ii. Defi~citiovrs For convenience, before further description of the present invention, certain terms employed in the specification, examples, and appended claims are collected here.
The term "allcyl" refers to the radical of saturated aliphatic groups, including straight-chain alkyl groups, branched-chain alkyl groups, cycloallcyl (alicyclic) groups, allcyl substituted cycloallcyl groups, and cycloalkyl substituted alkyl groups.
In preferred embodiments, a straight chain or branched chain alkyl has 30 or fewer carbon atoms in its backbone (e.g., C1-C30 for straight chain, C3-C3p for branched chain), and more preferably 20 or fewer. Likewise, preferred cycloallcyls have from 3-10 carbon atoms in their ring structure, and more preferably have 5, 6 or 7 carbons in the ring structure.
Moreover, the term "allcyl" (or "lower alkyl") as used throughout the specification and claims is intended to include both "unsubstituted alkyls"
and "substituted alkyls", the latter of which refers to alkyl moieties having substituents replacing a hydrogen on one or more carbons of the hydrocarbon backbone. Such substituents can include, for example, a halogen, a hydroxyl, a carbonyl (such as a carboxyl, an ester, a formyl, or a ketone), a thiocarbonyl (such as a thioester, a thioacetate, or a thioformate), an alkoxyl, a phosphoryl, a phosphonate, a phosphinate, an amino, an amido, an amidine, an imine, a cyano, a nitro, an azido, a sulfliydryl, an allcylthio, a sulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfamoyl, a sulfonamido, a sulfonyl, a heterocyclyl, an arallcyl, or an aromatic or heteroaromatic moiety. It will be understood by those slcilled in the art that the moieties substituted on the hydrocarbon chain can themselves be substituted, if appropriate. For instance, the substituents of a substituted allcyl may include substituted and unsubstituted forms of amino, azido, imino, amido, phosphoryl (including phosphonate and phosphinate), sulfonyl (including sulfate, sulfonamido, sulfamoyl and sulfonate), and silyl groups, as well as ethers, allcylthios, carbonyls (including lcetones, aldehydes, carboxylates, and esters), -CF3, -CN
and the lilce. Exemplary substituted allcyls are described below. Cycloallcyls can be fiuther substituted with . alkyls, allcenyls, allcoxys, allcylthios, aminoallcyls, carbonyl s substituted allcyls, -CF3, -CN, and the lilce.
The term "arallcyl", as used herein, refers to an allcyl group substituted with an aryl group (e.g., an aromatic or heteroaromatic group).
The terms "allcenyl" and "alkynyl" refer to unsaturated aliphatic groups analogous in length and possible substitution to the alkyls described above, but that contain at least one double or triple bond respectively.
Unless the number of carbons is otherwise specified, "lower alleyl" as used herein means an allcyl group, as defined above, but having from one to ten carbons, more preferably from one to six carbon atoms in its backbone structure.
Likewise, "lower allcenyl" and "lower allcynyl" have similar chain lengths. Preferred alkyl groups are lower allcyls. In preferred embodiments, a substituent designated herein as allcyl is a lower allcyl.
The term "aryl" as used herein includes 5-, 6- and 7-membered single-ring aromatic groups that may include from zero to four heteroatoms, for example, benzene, pyrrole, fitran, thiophene, imidazole, oxazole, thiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine and pyrimidine, and the like. Those aryl groups having heteroatoms in the ring structure may also be referred to as "aryl heterocycles" or "heteroaromatics". The aromatic ring can be substituted at one or more ring positions with such substituents as described above, for example, halogen, azide, allcyl, arallcyl, allcenyl, allcynyl, cycloallcyl, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, sulfliydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxyl, silyl, ether, allcylthio, sulfonyl, sulfonamido, lcetorie, aldehyde, ester, heterocyclyl, aromatic or heteroaromatic moieties, -CF3, -CN, or the lilce. The term "aryl" also includes polycyclic ring systems having two or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are cormnon to two adjoining rings (the rings are "fused rings") wherein at least one of the rings is aromatic, e.g., the other cyclic rings can be cycloallcyls, cycloallcenyls, cycloallcynyls, aryls and/or heterocyclyls.
The terms "heterocyclyl" or "heterocyclic group" refer to 3- to 10-membered ring structures, more preferably 3- to 7-membered rings, whose ring structures include one to four heteroatoms. Heterocycles can also be polycycles. Heterocyclyl groups include, for example, thiophene, thianthrene, fuxan, pyran, isobenzofuran, chromene, xanthene, phenoxathiin, pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, isothiazole, isoxazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, pyrimidine, phenanthroline, phenazine, phenarsazine, phenothiazine, furazan, phenoxazine, pyrrolidine, oxolane, thiolane, oxazole, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, lactones, lactams such as azetidinones and pyrrolidinones, sultams, sultones, and the like. The heterocyclic ring can be substituted at one or more positions with such substituents as described above, as for example, halogen, alkyl, arallcyl, allcenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, vitro, sulfliydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosplunate, carbonyl, carboxyl, silyl, ether, allcylthio, sulfonyl, ketone, aldehyde, ester, a heterocyclyl, an aromatic or heteroaromatic moiety, -CF3, -CN, or the like.
The terms "polycyclyl" or "polycyclic group" refer to two or more rings (e.g., cycloallcyls, cycloallcenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls and/or heterocyclyls) in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings, e.g., the rings are "fused rings".
Rings that are joined through non-adjacent atoms are termed "bridged" rings.
Each of the rings of the polycycle can be substituted with such substituents as described above, as for example, halogen, alkyl, arallcyl, allcenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, vitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxyl, silyl, ether, alkylthio, sulfonyl, lcetone, aldehyde, ester, a heterocyclyl, an aromatic or heteroaromatic moiety, -CF3, -CN, or the like.
The term "carbocycle", as used herein, refers to an aromatic or non-aromatic ring in which each atom of the ring is carbon.
The term "heteroatom" as used herein means an atom of any element other than carbon or hydrogen. Preferred heteroatoms are nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and phosphorous.
As used herein, the term "nitro" means -N02; the term "halogen" designates -F, -Cl, -Br or -I; the term "sulfhydryl" means -SH; the term "hydroxyl" means -OH;
and the term "sulfonyl" means -SO~-.
The terms "amine" and "amino" are art recognized and refer to both unsubstituted and substituted amines, e.g., a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
'R~o R~~o -N~ or -N+ R~ o R9 Rs wherein Rg, R1 p and R' 1 p each independently represent a hydrogen, an allcyl, an allcenyl, -(CH~)m-Rg, or Rg and Rl p talcen together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocycle having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure; Rg represents an aryl, a cycloallcyl, a cycloallcenyl, a heterocycle or a polycycle; and m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8. In preferred embodiments, only one of Rg or Rlp can be a carbonyl, e.g., Rg, Rlp and the nitrogen together do not form an imide.
In even more preferred embodiments, Rg and Rl p (and optionally R' 1 p) each independently represent a hydrogen, an allcyl, an alkenyl, or -(CH~)m-Rg.
Thus, the term "allcylamine" as used herein means an amine group, as defined above, having a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl attached thereto, i.e., at least one of Rg and Rlp is an alkyl group.
The term "acylamino" is art-recognized and refers to a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
Rg N~R~11 wherein R9 is as defined above, and R' 11 represents a hydrogen, an allcyl, an allcenyl or -(CH2)m Rg, where m and Rg are as defined above.
The term "amido" is art recogiuzed as an amino-substituted carbonyl and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
,.o \N-Rio Rg wherein R9, R10 are as defined above. Preferred embodiments of the amide will not include imides which may be unstable.
The term "allcylthio" refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, having a sulfur radical attached thereto. In preferred embodiments, the "allcylthio"
moiety is represented by one of -S-alkyl, -S-alkenyl, -S-alkynyl, and -S-(CH2)m-Rg, wherein m and Rg are defined above. Representative allcylthio groups include methyltluo, ethyl thio, and the like.
The term "carbonyl" is art recognized and includes such moieties as can be represented by the general formula:
O O
or -X-5( X-R11 ~R~~ ~
wherein X is a bond or represents an oxygen or a sulfur, and Rll represents a hydrogen, am alkyl, an allcenyl, -(CH2)m-Rg or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, R' 11 represents a hydrogen, an allcyl, an allcenyl or -(CH2)m Rg, where m and Rg are as defined above. Where X is an oxygen and Rl 1 or R' 11 is not hydrogen, the formula represents an "ester". Where X is an oxygen, and Rl 1 is as defined above, the moiety is referred to herein as a carboxyl group, and particularly when Rll is a hydrogen, the formula represents a "carboxylic acid". Where X is an oxygen, and R' 11 is hydrogen, the formula represents a "formate". In general, where the oxygen atom of the above formula is replaced by sulfur, the formula represents a "thiolcarbonyl" group. Where X is a sulfur and Rl 1 or R' 11 is not hydrogen, the formula represents a "thioester." Where X is a sulfur and Rll is hydrogen, the formula represents a "thiocarboxylic acid." Where X is a sulfur and Rll' is hydrogen, the formula represents a "thioformate." On the other hand, where X
is a bond, and Rll is not hydrogen, the above formula represents a "lcetone" group.
Where X is a bond, and Rl 1 is hydrogen, the above formula represents an "aldehyde"
group.
The terms "alkoxyl" or "alkoxy" as used herein refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, having an oxygen radical attached thereto. Representative allcoxyl groups include methoxy, ethoxy, propyloxy, tert-butoxy and the lilce. An "ether" is two hydrocarbons covalently linlced by an oxygen. Accordingly, the substituent of an allcyl that renders that alkyl an ether is or resembles an allcoxyl, such as can be represented by one of -O-alkyl, -O-allcenyl, -O-allcynyl, -O-(CH2)m-Rg, where m and Rg are described above.
The term "sulfonate" is art recognized and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
_II_ II oRa1 O
in which Rq.l is an electron pair, hydrogen, alkyl, cycloallcyl, or aryl.
The term "sulfate" is art recognized and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
O
O
in which Rq.l is as defined above.
The term "sulfonamido" is art recognized and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
O S, R~11 -~i \O
in which R9 and R' 11 are as defined above.
The term "sulfamoyl" is art-recognized and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
~Rlo -S-N
O \Rs in which Rg and Rl0 are as defined above.
The terms "sulfoxido" or "sulfinyl", as used herein, refers to a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
/o -s in which Rq.q. is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, allcenyl, alkynyl, cycloallcyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, or aryl.
A "phosphoryl" can in general be represented by the formula:
-P-OR4s wherein Q1 represented S or O, and Rq.6 represents hydrogen, a lower allcyl or an aryl. When used to substitute, e.g., an allcyl, the phosphoryl group of the phosphorylallcyl can be represented by the general formula:
-Q2- i -O- Or -02- i -OR46 O R4g ~ R46 wherein Q1 represented S or O, and each Rq.6 independently represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl or an aryl, Q~ represents O, S or N. When Q1 is an S, the phosphoryl moiety is a "phosphorothioate".
A "phosphoramidite" can be represented in the general formula:
-Q2- i -O- or -QZ-P-OR4s N(Rs)R1o N(R9)R1o wherein R9 and Rl0 are as defined above, and Q2 represents O, S or N.
A "phosphonamidite" can be represented in the general formula:
-OZ- i -O- or -QZ-p-OR46 N(R9)R1p OR46 wherein R9 and Rl p are as defined above, Q~ represents O, S or N, and Rq.g represents a lower allcyl or an aryl, Q2 represents O, S or N.
A "selenoallcyl" refers to an alkyl group having a substituted seleno group attached thereto. Exemplary "selenoethers" which may be substituted on the allcyl are selected from one of -Se-alkyl, -Se-allcenyl, -Se-alkynyl, and -Se-(CH2)m-R7, m and R7 being defined above.
Analogous substitutions can be made to allcenyl and allcynyl groups to produce, for example, asninoallcenyls, aminoallcynyls, amidoallcenyls, amidoallcynyls, iminoalkenyls, iminoallcynyls, thioallcenyls, thioallcynyls, carbonyl-substituted allcenyls or alkynyls.
It will be understood that "substitution" or "substituted with" includes the implicit proviso that such substitution is in accordance with permitted valence of the substituted atom and the substituent, and that the substitution results in a stable compound, e.g., which does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, etc.
As used herein, the term "substituted" is contemplated to include all permissible substituents of organic compounds. In a broad aspect, the permissible substituents include acyclic and cyclic, branched and unbranched, carbocyclic and heterocyclic, axomatic and nonaromatic substituents of organic compounds.
Illustrative substituents include, for example, those described hereinabove.
The permissible substituents can be one or more and the same or different for appropriate organic compounds. For purposes of this invention, the heteroatoms such as nitrogen may have hydrogen substituents and/or any permissible substituents of organic compounds described herein which satisfy the valencies of the heteroatoms.
This invention is not intended to be limited in any manner by the permissible substituents of organic compounds.
A "small" substituent is one of 10 atoms or less.
By the terms "amino acid residue" and "peptide residue" is meant an amino acid or peptide molecule without the -OH of its carboxyl group. In general the abbreviations used herein for designating the amino acids and the protective groups axe based on recormnendations of the IUPAC-IUB Commission on Biochemical Nomenclature (see Biochemistry (1972) 11:1726-1732). For instance Met, Ile, Leu, Ala and Gly represent "residues"of methionine, isoleucine, leucine, alanine and glycine, respectively. By the residue is meant a radical derived from the corresponding a-amino acid by eliminating the OH portion of the carboxyl group and the H portion of the a-amino group. The term "amino acid side chain" is that part of an amino acid exclusive of the - CH(NH2)COOH portion, as defined by K. D.
Kopple, "Peptides and Amino Acids", W. A. Benjamin Inc., New Yorlc and Amsterdam, 1966, pages 2 and 33; examples of such side chains of the common amino acids are -CH2CH2SCH3 (the side chain of methionine), -CH2(CH3)-CH2CH3 (the side chain of isoleucine), -CH2CH(CH3)~ (the side chain of leucine) or H-(the side chain of glycine).
For the most part, the amino acids used in the application of this invention are those naturally occurring amino acids found in proteins, or the naturally occurring anabolic or catabolic products of such amino acids which contain amino and carboxyl groups. Particularly suitable amino acid side chains include side chains selected from those of the following amino acids: glycine, alanine, valine, cysteine, leucine, isoleucine, serine, threonine, methionine, glutamic acid, aspartic acid, glutamine, asparagine, lysine, arginine, proline, histidine, phenylalanine, tyrosine, and tryptophan, and those amino acids and amino acid analogs which have been identified as constituents of peptidylglycan bacterial cell walls.
The term ' amino acid residue further includes analogs, derivatives and congeners of any specific amino acid referred to herein, as well as C-terminal or N-terminal protected amino acid derivatives (e.g. modified with an N-terminal or C-terminal protecting group). For example, the present invention contemplates the use of amino acid analogs wherein a side chain is lengthened or shortened wlule still providing a carboxyl, amino or other reactive precursor functional group for cyclization, as well as amino acid analogs having variant side chains with appropriate functional groups). For instance, the subject compound can include an amino acid analog such as, for example, cyanoalanine, canavanine, djeu~olic acid, norleucine, 3-phosphoserine, homoserine, dihydroxy-phenylalanine, 5-hydroxytryptophan, 1-methylhistidine, 3-methylhistidine, diaminopimelic acid, ornithine, or diaminobutyric acid. Other naturally occurring amino acid metabolites or precursors having side chains which are suitable herein will be recognized by those skilled in the art and are included in the scope of the present invention.
Also included are the (D) and (L) stereoisomers of such amino acids when the structure of the amino acid admits of stereoisomeric forms. The configuration of the amino acids and amino acid residues herein are designated by the appropriate symbols (D), (L) or (DL), furthermore when the configuration is not designated the amino acid or residue can have the configuration (D), (L) or (DL). It will be noted that the structure of some of the compounds of this invention includes asymmetric carbon atoms.
It is to be understood accordingly that the isomers arising from such asymmetry are included within the scope of this invention. Such isomers can be obtained in substantially pure form by classical separation techniques and by sterically controlled synthesis. For the purposes of this application, unless expressly noted to the contrary, a named amino acid shall be construed to include both the (D) or (z) stereoisomers.
The phrase "protecting group" as used herein means substituents which protect the reactive functional group from undesirable chemical reactions. Examples of such protecting groups include esters of carboxylic acids and boronic acids, ethers of alcohols and acetals and ketals of aldehydes and ketones. For instance, the phrase "N-terminal protecting group" or "amino-protecting group" as used herein refers to various amino-protecting groups which can be employed to protect the N-terminus of an amino acid or peptide against undesirable reactions during synthetic procedures.
Examples of suitable groups include acyl protecting groups such as, to illustrate, formyl, dansyl, acetyl, benzoyl, trifluoroacetyl, succinyl and methoxysuccinyl;
aromatic urethane. protecting groups as, for example, benzyloxycarbonyl (Cbz);
and aliphatic urethane protecting groups such as t-butoxycarbonyl (Boc) or 9-Fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl (FM~C).
As noted above, certain compounds of the present invention may exist in particular geometric or stereoisomeric forms. The present invention contemplates all such compounds, including cis- and trans-isomers, R- and S-enantiomers, diastereomers, (D)-isomers, (L)-isomers, the racemic mixtures thereof, and other mixtures thereof, as falling within the scope of the invention. Additional asymmetric carbon atoms may be present in a substituent such as an allcyl group. All such isomers, as well as mixtures thereof, are intended to be included in this invention.
If, for instance, a particular enantiomer of a compound of the present invention is desired, it may be prepared by asymmetric synthesis, or by derivation with a chiral auxiliary, where the resulting diastereomeric mixture is separated and the auxiliary group cleaved to provide the pure desired enantiomers. Alternatively, where the molecule contains a basic functional group, such as amino, or an acidic functional group, such as carboxyl, diastereomeric salts are formed with an appropriate optically-active acid or base, followed by resolution of the diastereomers thus formed by fractional crystallization or chromatographic means well known in the art, amd subsequent recovery of the pure enantiomers.
For purposes of this invention, the chemical elements are identified in accordance with the Periodic Table of the Elements, CAS version, Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 67th Ed., 1986-87, inside cover. Also for purposes of this invention, the term "hydrocarbon" is contemplated to include all permissible compounds having at least one hydrogen and one carbon atom. In a broad aspect, the permissible hydrocarbons include acyclic and cyclic, branched and unbranched, carbocyclic acid heterocyclic, aromatic and nonaromatic orgaiuc compounds which can be substituted or unsubstituted.
, 20 A compound is said to have an "insulinotropic activity" if it is able to stimulate, or cause the stimulation of, the synthesis or expression of the hormone insulin.
The phrase "targeted by" refers to cells which are attacked and/or gradually destroyed by an autoimmune disease. For example, in Type I diabetes white blood cells called T lymphocytes produce immune factors called cytolcines that attaclc and gradually destroy the beta cells of the pancreas.
iii. Exem~la~y Fo~mulatiohs The inhibitors useful in the subject methods possess, in certain embodiments, the ability to lower blood glucose levels, to relieve obesity, to alleviate impaired glucose tolerance, to inhibit hepatic glucose neogenesis, to inhibit diabetic lcetoacidosis, and to lower blood lipid levels and to inhibit aldose reductase. They are thus useful for the prevention and/or therapy of hyperglycemia, obesity, hyperlipidemia, diabetic complications (including retinopathy, nephropathy, neuropathy, cataracts, coronary artery disease and arteriosclerosis) and furthermore for obesity-related hypertension and osteoporosis.
Diabetes mellitus is a disease characterized by hyperglycemia occurring from a relative or absolute decrease in insulin secretion, decreased insulin sensitivity or insulin resistance. The morbidity and mortality of this disease result from vascular, renal, and neurological complications. An oral glucose tolerance test is a clinical test used to diagnose diabetes. In an oral glucose tolerance test, a patient's physiological response to a glucose load or challenge is evaluated. After ingesting the glucose, the patient's physiological response to the glucose challenge is evaluated.
Generally, this is accomplished by determining the patient's blood glucose levels (the concentration of glucose in the patient's plasma, serum or whole blood) for several predetermined points in time.
As described in the appended examples, we demonstrate that, ih vivo, high affnuty inhibitors of DPIV are biologically active with respect to regulation of glucose metabolism. For example, a single injection of the inhibitor Pro-born-Pro (see examples for structure) was alone sufficient to improve glucose control. A
single injection of Pro-boro-Pro was also observed to potentiate the response to a subtherapeutic dose of GLP-1. We have also observed that chronic (>5 days) treatment with Pro-boro-Pro alone lowers both fasting blood sugars, and the glycemic excursion to oral glucose challenge.
As indicated above, the inhibitors useful in the subject method can be peptide-or peptidomimetic-derived inhibitors of the target proteolytic activity, or can be a non-peptide compound identified, e.g., by drug screening assays described herein.
As discussed further below, a variety of assays are available in the art for identifying potential inhibitors of DPIV and the like, as well as assessing the various biological activities (including side-effects and toxicity) of such an inhibitor.
A. Examples of peptidyl DPITl inhibito~~s In the case of DPIV inhibitors, a preferred class of inhibitors are peptidyl compounds based on the dipeptides Pro-Pro or Ala-Pro. Another preferred class of peptidyl inhibitors are compounds based on the dipeptide (D)-Ala-(L)-Ala. In many embodiments, it will be desirable to provide the peptidyl moiety as a peptidomimetic, e.g., to increase bioavailability and/or increase the serum half life relative to the equivalent peptide. For instance, a variety of peptide backbone analogs are available in the art and be readily adpated for use in the subject methods.
In an exemplary embodiment, the peptidomimetic can be derived as a retro-inverso analog of the peptide. To illustrate, certain of the subject peptides can be generated as the retro-inverso analog (shown in its unprotected state):
D N N~ ,OH
H2N L H ~ I
R' O O OH
Such retro-inverso analogs can be made according to the methods known in the art, such as that described by the Sisto et al. U.S. Patent 4,522,752. For example, the illustrated retro-inverso analog can be generated as follows. The geminal diamine corresponding to the N-terminal amino acid analogs is synthesized by treating an N-Boc-protected amino acid (having the sidechain R) with ammonia under HOBT-DCC
coupling conditions to yield amide, and then effecting a Hofmann-type rearrangement with I,I-bis-(trifluoroacetoxy)iodobenzene (TIB), as described in Radhalcrishna et al.
(1979) J. O~g. Chem. 44:1746. The product amine salt is then coupled to a side-chain protected (e.g., as the benzyl ester) N-Fmoc D-enatiomer of the second amino acid residue (e.g., having a sidechain R') under standard conditions to yield the pseudodipeptide. The Fmoc (fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl) group is removed with piperidine in dimethylformamide, and the resulting amine is trimethylsilylated with bistrimethylsilylacetamide (BSA) before condensation with suitably allcylated, side-chain protected derivative of Meldrum's acid, as described in U.S. Patent 5,061,811 to Pinori et al., to yield the retro-inverso tripeptide analog. The pseudotripeptide is then coupled with (protected) born-proline under standard conditions to give the protected tetrapeptide analog. The protecting groups are removed to release the final product, which is purified by HPLC.
In another illustrative embodiment, the peptidomimetic can be derived as a retro-enantio analog of the peptide:
HO O CHg O R
HO' B~ D N D ~
N N D N~COOR
H ~ H
O R' v Retro-enantio analogs such as this can be synthesized using D-enatiomers of commercially available D-amino acids or other amino acid analogs and standard solid-or solution-phase peptide-synthesis techniques.
In still another illustrative embodiment, trans-olefin derivatives can be made with the subject boronophenylalanine analogs. For example, an exemplary olefin analog is:
R CHg N \ N~ OOH
H2N ~ v ~ B
O R' O OH
The trans olefin analog can be synthesized according to the method of Y.K.
Shue et al. (1987) Tet~ ahed~~o~ Letter°s 28:3225.
Still another class of peptidomimetic boronophenylalanine derivatives include the phosphonate derivatives, such as:
N IPA N~ OOH
H2N ~ ~OH O ~ I
O R' O OH
The synthesis of such phosphonate derivatives can be adapted from known synthesis schemes. See, for example, Loots et al. in Peptides: Chemistry a~cd Biology, (Escom Science Publishers, Leiden, 1988, p. 118); Petrillo et al. in Peptides:
Sh°uctuy~e and Function (Proceedings of the 9th American Peptide Symposium, Pierce Chemical Co.
Roclcland, IL, 1985).
B. Non peptidyl DPITr iv~hibito~s . The pharmaceutical industry has developed a variety of different strategies for assessing millions of compounds a year as potential lead compounds based on inhibitory activity against an enzyme. DPIV and other proteolytic enzymes targeted by the subject method are amenable to the types of high throughput screening required to saanple large arrays of compounds and natural extracts for suitable inhibitors.
As an illustrative embodiment, the ability of a test agent to inhibit DPIV can be assessed using a colorimetric or fluorometric substrate, such as Ala-Pro-paranitroanilide. See US Patent 5,462,928. Moreover, DPIV can be purified, and is accordingly readily amenable for use in such high throughput formats as mufti-well plates.
Briefly, DPIV is purified from pig l~idney cortex (Berth et al. (1974) Acta Biol Med Germ 32:157; Wolf et al. (1972) Acta Bio Mes Germ 37:409) or human placenta (Puschel et al. (1982) Eur J Biochem 126:359). An illustrative reaction mixture includes SO~M sodium Hepes (pH7.8), 10~,M Ala-Pro-paranitroanilide, 6 milliunits of DPIV, and 2% (v/v) dimethylformamide in a total volume of 1.0 mL. The reaction is initiated by addition of enzyme, and formation of reaction product (paranitroanilide) in the presence and absence of a test compound can be detected photometrically, e.g., at 410 mn.
Exemplary compounds which can be screened for activity against DPIV (or other relevant enzymes) include peptides, nucleic acids, carbohydrates, small organic molecules, and natural product extract libraries, such as isolated from animals, plants, fungus and/or microbes.
C. Assays of Insulifzot~opic Activity In selecting a compound suitable for use in the subject method, it is noted that the insulinotropic property of a compound may be determined by providing that compound to animal cells, or injecting that compound into animals and monitoring the release of immunoreactive insulin (IRI) into the media or circulatory system of the animal, respectively. The presence of IRI can be detected through the use of a radioimmunoassay which can specifically detect insulin.
Nonobese diabetic (NOD) mice are a well established model of type I diabetes (IDDM). In most litters, a prediabetic (>20 weelcs) phase is observed which is characterized by pancreatic insulitis without hyperglycemia. The NOD mice can purchased from, for example, The Jaclcson Laboratories (Bar Harbor, Me.). In an exemplary embodiment, for treatment of the mice with a regimen including a DPIV
inhibitor or control, sub-orbital sinus blood samples are taken before and at some time (e.g., 60 minutes) after dosing of each animal. Blood glucose measurements can be made by any of several conventional techniques, such as using a glucose meter.
The blood glucose levels of the control and DPIV inhibitor dosed animals are compared The metabolic fate of exogenous GLP-1 can also be followed in either nondiabetic and type I diabetic subjects, and the effect of a candidate DPIV
inhibitor determined. For instance, a combination of high-pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC), specific radioimmunoassays (RIAs), and a enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA), can be used, whereby intact biologically active GLP-1 and its metabolites can be detected. See, for example, Deacon et al. (1995) Diabetes 44:1126-1131. To illustrate, after GLP-1 administration, the intact peptide can be measured using an NH2-terminally directed RIA or ELISA, while the difference in concentration between these assays and a COOH-terminal-specific RIA allowed determination of NH2-terminally truncated metabolites. Without inhibitor, subcutaneous GLP-1 is rapidly degraded in a time-dependent mamzer, forming a metabolite wluch co-elutes on HPLC with GLP-I(9-36) amide and has the same immunoreactive profile. For instance, thirty minutes after subcutaneous GLP-1 administration to diabetic patients (n = 8), the metabolite accounted for 88.5 + 1.9%
of the increase in plasma immunoreactivity determined by the COOH-terminal RIA, which was higher than the levels measured in healthy subjects (78.4 + 3:2%; n = 8; P
< 0.05). See Deacon et al., supra. Intravenously infused GLP-I was also extensively degraded.
D. Pharmaceutical Foy~mulations The inhibitors can be administered in various forms, depending on the disorder to be treated and the age, condition and body weight of the patient, as is well l~nown in the art. For example, where the compounds are to be administered orally, they may be formulated as tablets, capsules, granules, powders or syrups; or for parenteral administration, they may be formulated as injections (intravenous, intramuscular or subcutaneous), drop infusion preparations or suppositories. For application by the ophthalmic mucous membrane route, they may be formulated as eyedrops or eye ointments. These formulations can be prepared by conventional means, and, if desired, the active ingredient may be mixed with any conventional additive, such as an excipient, a binder, a disintegrating agent, a lubricant, a corrigent, a solubilizing agent, a suspension aid, an emulsifying agent or a coating agent. Although the dosage will vary depending on the symptoms, age and body weight of the patient, the nature and severity of the disorder to be treated or prevented, the route of administration and the form of the drug, in general, a daily dosage of from 0.01 to 2000 mg of the compound is recommended for an adult human patient, and this may be administered in a single dose or in divided doses.
Glucose metabolism can be altered, and symptoms associated with type I
diabetes can be decreased or eliminated, in accordance with a "timed"
administration of DPIV inhibitors wherein one or more appropriate indices for glucose metabolism and/or type I diabetes can be used to assess effectiveness of the treatment (dosage and/or timing): e.g. glucose tolerance, glucose level, insulin level, insulin sensitivity, glycosylated hemoglobin.
An effective time for administering DPIV inhibitors needs to be identified.
This can be accomplished by routine experiment as described below, using one or more groups of animals (preferably at least 5 animals per group).
In animals, insulinotropic activity by DPIV inlubitor treatment can be assessed by administering the inhibitor at a particular time of day and measuring the effect of the administration (if any) by measuring one or more indices associated with glucose metabolism, and comparing the post-treatment values of these indices to the values of the same indices prior to treatment.
The precise time of administration and/or amount of DPIV inhibitor that will yield the most effective results in terms of efficacy of treatment in a given patient will depend upon the' activity, pharmacol~inetics, and bioavailability of a particular compound, physiological condition of the patient (including age, sex, disease type and stage, general physical condition, responsiveness to a given dosage and type of medication), route of administration, etc. However, the above guidelines can be used as the basis for fine-tuning the treatment, e.g., determining the optimum time and/or amount of administration, which will require no more than routine experimentation consisting of monitoring the subject and adjusting the dosage and/or timing.
While the subject is being treated, glucose metabolism is monitored by measuring one or more of the relevant indices at predetermined times during a 24=
hour period. Treatment (amounts, times of administration and type of medication) may be adjusted (optimized) according to the results of such monitoring. The patient is periodically reevaluated to determine extent of improvement by measuring the same parameters, the first such reevaluation typically occurring at the end of four weeps from the onset of therapy, and subsequent reevaluations occurring every 4 to 8 weeks during therapy and then every 3 months thereafter. Therapy may continue for several months or even years with six months being a typical length of therapy for humans.
Adjustments to the amounts) of drugs) administered and possibly to the time of administration may be made based on these reevaluations. For example, if after 4 weeks of treatment one of the metabolic indices has not improved but at least one other one has, the dose could be increased by 1/3 without changing the time of administration.
Treatment can be initiated with smaller dosages which are less than the optimum dose of the compound. Thereafter, the dosage should be increased by small increments until the optimum effect under the circumstances is reached. For convenience, the total daily dosage may be divided and administered in portions during the day if desired.
The phrase "therapeutically effective amount" as used herein means that amount of, e.g., a DPIV inhibitor(s), which is effective for producing some desired therapeutic effect by inhibiting, for example, the proteolysis of a peptide hormone at a reasonable benefit/risl~ ratio applicable to any medical treatment.
The phrase "pharmaceutically acceptable" is employed herein to refer to those DPIV inhibitors, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings and animals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risl~
ratio.
The phrase "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" as used herein means a pharmaceutically-acceptable material, composition or vehicle, such as a liquid or.sohid filler, diluent, excipient, solvent or encapsulating material, involved in carrying or transporting the subject chemical from one organ, or portion of the body, to another organ, or portion of the body. Each carrier must be "acceptable" in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not injurious to the patient. Some examples of materials which can serve as pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers include: (1) sugars, such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; (2) starches, such as corn starch and potato starch; (3) cellulose, and its derivatives, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; (4) powdered tragacanth; (5) malt; (6) gelatin; (7) talc; (8) excipients, such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; (9) oils, such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil, safflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil and soybean oil; (10) glycols, such as propylene glycol; (11) polyols, such as glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol and polyethylene glycol; (12) esters, such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; (13) agar; (14) buffering agents, such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydroxide; (15) alginic acid; (16) pyrogen-free water;
(17) isotonic saline; (18) Ringer's solution; (19) ethyl alcohol; (20) phosphate buffer solutions; and (21) other non-toxic compatible substances employed in pharmaceutical formulations.
The term "pharmaceutically acceptable salts" refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic acid addition salts of DPIV inhibitors. These salts can be prepaxed in situ during the final isolation and purification of the DPIV
Inhibitors, or by separately reacting a purified DPIV inhibitor in its free base form with a suitable organic or inorganic acid, and isolating the salt thus formed. Representative salts include the hydrobromide, hydrochloride, sulfate, bisulfate, phosphate, nitrate, acetate, valerate, oleate, palmitate, stearate, laurate, benzoate, lactate, phosphate, tosylate, citrate, maleate, fumarate, succinate, tartrate, napthylate, mesylate, glucoheptonate, lactobionate, and laurylsulphonate salts and the like. (See, for example, Berge et al. (1977) "Pharmaceutical Salts", J. Pha~m. Sci. 66:1-19) In other cases, the DPIV inhibitor useful in the methods of the present invention may contain one or more acidic functional groups and, thus, are capable of forming pharmaceutically acceptable salts with pharmaceutically acceptable bases.
The term "pharmaceutically-acceptable salts" in these instances refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic base addition salts of a DPIV inhibitor(s).
These salts can likewise be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the DPIV inhibitor(s), or by separately reacting the purified DPIV inhibitors) in its flee acid form with a suitable base, such as the hydroxide, carbonate or bicarbonate of a pharmaceutically-acceptable metal canon, with ammonia, or with a pharmaceutically-acceptable organic primary, secondary or tertiary amine. Representative alkali or alkaline earth salts include the lithium, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and aluminum salts and the lilce. Representative organc amines useful for the formation of base addition salts include ethylamine, diethylamine, ethylenediamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, piperazine and the lilee (see, for example, Berge et al., supra).
Wetting agents, emulsifiers and lubricants, such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate, as well as coloring agents, release agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring and perfuming agents, preservatives and antioxidants can also be present in the compositions.
Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable antioxidants include: (1) water soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like; (2) oil-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), lecithin, propyl gallate, alpha-tocopherol, and the like; and (3) metal chelating agents, such as citric acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), sorbitol, tartaric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like.
Formulations useful in the methods of the present invention include those suitable for oral, nasal, topical (including buccal and sublingual), rectal, vaginal, aerosol and/or parenteral administration. The formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any methods well known in the art of pharmacy. The amount of active ingredient which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host being treated, the particular mode of administration. The amount of active ingredient which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will generally be that amount of the compound which produces a therapeutic effect.
Generally, out of one hundred per cent, this amount will range from about 1 per cent to about ninety-nine percent of active ingredient, preferably from about 5 per cent to about 70 per cent, most preferably from about 10 per cent to about 30 per cent.
Methods of preparing these formulations or compositions include the step of bringing into association a DPIV inhibitors) with the carrier and, optionally, one or more accessory ingredients. In general, the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association a DPIV inhibitor with liquid carriers, or finely divided solid carriers, or both, and then, if necessary, shaping the product.
Formulations suitable for oral administration may be in the form of capsules, cachets, pills, tablets, lozenges (using a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth), powders, granules, or as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid, or as an. oil-in-water or water-in-oil liquid emulsion, or as an elixir or syrup, or as pastilles (using an inert base, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia) and/or as mouth washes and the like, each containing a predetermined amount of a DPIV inhibitors) as an active ingredient. A compound may also be administered as a bolus, electuary or paste.
In solid dosage forms for oral administration (capsules, tablets, pills, dragees, powders, granules and the like), the active ingredient is mixed with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers, such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate, and/or any of the following: (1) fillers or extenders, such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and/or silicic acid; (2) binders, such as, for example, carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, sucrose and/or acacia; (3) humectants, such as glycerol; (4) disintegrating agents, such as agar-agax, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate; (5) solution retarding agents, such as paraffin; (6) absorption accelerators, such as quaternary ammonium compounds; (7) wetting agents, such as, for example, acetyl alcohol and glycerol monostearate; (~) absorbents, such as kaolin and bentonite clay; (9) lubricants, such a talc, calcium steaxate, magnesium stearate, solid polyethylene glycols, sodium lauryl sulfate, and mixtures thereof; and (10) coloring agents. In the case of capsules, tablets and pills, the pharmaceutical compositions may also comprise buffering agents. Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or mills sugars, as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the lilce.
A tablet may be made by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients. Compressed tablets may be prepared using binder (for example, gelatin or hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose), lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, disintegrant (for example, sodium starch glycolate or cross-linlced sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), surface-active or dispersing agent. Molded tablets may be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered peptide or peptidomimetic moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
Tablets, and other solid dosage forms, such as dragees, capsules, pills and granules, may optionally be scored or prepared with coatings and shells, such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical-formulating art.
They may also be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therein using, for example, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose in varying ' proportions to provide the desired release profile, other polymer matrices, liposomes and/or microspheres. They may be sterilized by, for example, filtration through a bacteria-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved in sterile water, or some other sterile injectable medium immediately before use. These compositions may also optionally contain opacifying agents and may be of a composition that they release the active ingredients) only, or preferentially, in a certain portion of the gastrointestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions which can be used include polymeric substances and waxes. The active ingredient can also be in micro-encapsulated form, if appropriate, with one or more of the above-described excipients.
Liquid dosage forms for oral administration include pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs. In addition to the active ingredient, the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art, such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers, such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof.
Besides inert diluents, the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, coloring, perfuming and preservative agents.
Suspensions, in addition to the active DPIV inhibitors) may contain suspending agents as, for example, ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminum metahydroxide, bentonite, agar-agar and tragacanth, and mixtures thereof.
Formulations for rectal or vaginal administration may be presented as a suppository, which may be prepared by mixing one or more DPIV inhibitors) with one or more suitable nonirritating excipients or carriers comprising, for example, cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol, a suppository wax or a salicylate, and which is solid at room temperature, but liquid at body temperature and, therefore, will melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active agent.
Formulations which are suitable for vaginal administration also include pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
Dosage forms for the topical or transdermal administration of a DPIV
inhibitors) include powders, sprays, ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, solutions, patches and inhalants. The active component may be mixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier, and with any preservatives, buffers, or propellants which may be required.
The ointments, pastes, creams and gels may contain, in addition to DPIV
° 20 inhibitor(s), excipients, such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.
Powders and sprays can contain, in addition to a DPIV inhibitor(s), excipients such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicates and polyamide powder, or mixtures of these substances. Sprays can additionally contain customary propellants, such as chlorofluorohydrocarbons and volatile unsubstituted hydrocarbons, such as butane and propane.
The DPIV inlubitor(s) can be alternatively administered by aerosol. This is ° accomplished by preparing an aqueous aerosol, liposomal preparation or solid particles containing the compound. A nonaqueous (e.g., fluorocarbon propellant) suspension could ~ be used. Sonic nebulizers are preferred because they minimize exposing the agent to shear, which can result in degradation of the compound.
Ordinarily, an aqueous aerosol is made by formulating an aqueous solution or suspension of the agent together with conventional pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and stabilizers. The carriers and stabilizers vary with the requirements of the particular compound, but typically include nonionic surfactants (Tweens, Pluronics, or polyethylene glycol), innocuous proteins lilce serum albumin, sorbitan esters, oleic acid, lecithin, amino acids such as glycine, buffers, salts, sugars or sugar alcohols.
Aerosols generally are prepared from isotonic solutions.
Transdermal patches have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of a DPIV inhibitors) to the body. Such dosage forms can be made by dissolving or dispersing the agent in the proper medium. Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the peptidomimetic across the slcin. The rate of such flux can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or dispersing the peptidomimetic in a polymer matrix or gel.
Ophthalmic formulations, eye ointments, powders, solutions and the lilce, are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention.
Pharmaceutical compositions of this invention suitable for parenteral administration comprise one or more DPIV inhibitors) in combination with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable sterile isotonic aqueous or nonaqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions, or sterile powders which may be reconstituted into sterile injectable solutions or dispersions just prior to use, which may contain antioxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient or suspending or thickening agents.
Examples of suitable aqueous and nonaqueous carriers which may be employed in the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention include water, ethanol, polyols (such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils, such as olive oil, and injectable organic esters, such as ethyl oleate. Proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of coating materials, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersions, and by the use of surfactants.
These compositions may also contain adjuvants such as preservatives, wetting agents, emulsifying agents and dispersing agents. Prevention of the action of microorganisms may be ensured by the inclusion of various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, paraben, chlorobutanol, phenol sorbic acid, and the lilce. It may also be desirable to include isotonic agents, such as sugars, sodium chloride, and the like into the compositions. In addition, prolonged absorption of the injectable pharmaceutical form may be brought about by the inclusion of agents which delay absorption such as aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
In some cases, in order to prolong the effect of a drug, it is desirable to slow the absorption of the drug from subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. This may be accomplished by the use of a liquid suspension of crystalline or amorphous material having poor water solubility. The rate of absorption of the drug then depends upon its rate of dissolution which, in turn, may depend upon crystal size and crystalline form.
Alternatively, delayed absorption of a parenterally-administered drug form is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the drug in an oil vehicle.
Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsule matrices of DPIV
inhibitors) in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide.
Depending on the ratio of drug to polymer, and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of drug release can be controlled. Examples of other biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the ~ drug in liposomes or microemulsions which are compatible with body tissue.
i~hen the DPIV inhibitors) of the present invention are administered as pharmaceuticals, to humans and animals, they can be given per se or as a pharmaceutical composition containing, for example, 0.1 to 99.5% (more preferably, 0.5 to 90%) of active ingredient in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
The preparations of agents may be given orally, parenterally, topically, or rectally. They are of course given by forms suitable for each administration route. For example, they are administered in tablets or capsule form, by injection, inhalation, eye lotion, ointment, suppository, etc. administration by injection, infusion or inhalation;
topical by lotion or ointment; and rectal by suppositories. Oral administration is preferred.
The phrases "paxenteral administration" and "administered parenterally" as used herein means modes of administration other than enteral and topical administration, usually by injection, and includes, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarterial, intrathecal, intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intraarticulare, subcapsular, subarachnoid, intraspinal and intrasternal injection and infusion.
The phrases "systemic administration," "administered systemically,"
"peripheral administration" and "administered peripherally" as used herein mean the administration of a DPIV inhibitor, drug or other material other than directly into the central nervous system, such that it enters the patient's system and, thus, is subject to metabolism and other lilce processes, for example, subcutaneous administration.
These DPIV inhibitors) may be administered to humans and other animals for therapy by any suitable route of administration, including orally, nasally, as by, for example, a spray, rectally, intravaginally, parenterally, intracisternally and topically, as by powders, ointments or drops, including buccally and sublingually.
Regardless of the route of administration selected, the DPIV inhibitor(s), which may be used in a suitable hydrated form, and/or the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention, are formulated into pharmaceutically-acceptable dosage forms by conventional methods lcnown to those of skill in the art.
Actual dosage levels of the active ingredients in the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention may be varied so as to obtain an amount of the active ingredient which is effective to achieve the desired therapeutic response for a particular patient, composition, and mode of administration, without being toxic to the patient.
E. Co~joi~t administratioh Another aspect of the invention provides a conjoint therapy wherein one or more other therapeutic agents are administered with the protease inhibitor.
Such conjoint treatment may be achieved by way of the simultaneous, sequential or separate dosing of the individual components of the treatment.
In one embodiment, a DPIV inhibitor is conjointly administered with immunosuppressive agents, such as, for example, cyclosporine; cyclosporine in conjunction with either azathioprine, steroids, or both; FI~506 tacrolimus (Prograf); or mycophenolate mofetil (Cellcept).
iv. Business Methods One aspect of the present invention relates to a lcit comprising compounds as described herein, such as DPIV inhibitors, for treatment or prevention of autoimmune disorders, such as Type 1 diabetes, septic shock, multiple sclerosis, IBD or Crohn's disease in a patient, preferably a human, and in association with instructions (written and/or pictorial) describing the use of the formulation for treatment or prevention of autoimmmle disorders, such as Type 1 diabetes, septic shock, multiple sclerosis, IBD
or Crohn's disease, and optionally, warnings of possible side effects and drug-drug or drug-food interactions.
The invention further contemplates a method for conducting a pharmaceutical business, comprising: (a) manufacturing a pharmaceutical prepaxation comprising a sterile pharmaceutical excipient and compounds as described herein, such as DPIV
inhibitors; and (b) marketing (e.g., providing promotional and/or informative presentations (such as displays, telemarlceting, and lectures), products (such as trial samples of the preparation), and/or documentation (including leaflets, pamphlets, websites, posters, etc.)) to healthcare providers, such as doctors, hospitals, clinics, etc., a benefit of using the pharmaceutical preparation for treatment or prevention of autoimmune disorders, such as Type 1 diabetes, septic shoclc, multiple sclerosis, IBD
or Crohn's disease.
A~iother aspect of the invention provides for a method for conducting a pharmaceutical business, comprising: (a) providing a distribution networlc for selling the pharmaceutical composition comprising a sterile pharmaceutical excipient and compounds as described herein, such as DPIV Inhibitors; and (b) providing instruction material to patients or physicians for using the pharmaceutical composition for treatment or prevention of autoimmune disorders, such as Type 1 diabetes, septic shock, multiple sclerosis, IBD or Crohn's disease.
Yet another aspect of the invention provides for a method for conducting a pharmaceutical business, comprising: (a) determining an appropriate pharmaceutical preparation and dosage of a compounds as described herein, such as DPIV
inhibitors for treatment or prevention of autoimmune disorders, such as Type 1 diabetes, septic shock, multiple sclerosis, IBD or Crohn's disease; (b) conducting therapeutic profiling of the pharmaceutical preparation for efficacy and toxicity in animals; (c) providing a distribution network for selling a pharmaceutical composition having an acceptable therapeutic profile; and, optionally, (d) providing a sales group for marketing the preparation to healthcare providers.
Exemplification The invention now being generally described, it will be more readily understood by reference to the following examples which are included merely for purposes of illustration of certain aspects and embodiments of the present invention, and are not intended to limit the invention.
Exafnple 1: Synthesis of Bo~~oP~oli~ce Referring to Figure 1, the starting compound I is prepared essentially by the procedure of Matteson et al. (Organometallics 3:1284, 1984), except that a pinacol ester is substituted for the pinanediol ester. Similar compounds such as boropipecolic acid and 2-azetodine boronic acid can be prepared by malting the appropriate selection of starting material to yield the pentyl and propyl analogs of compound I.
Further, Cl can be substituted for Br in the formula, and other diol protecting groups can be substituted for pinacol in the formula, e.g., 2, 3-butanediol and alphapinanediol.
Compound II is prepared by reacting compound I with [(CH3)03Si]~N-Li+ . In this reaction hexamethyldisilazane is dissolved in tetrahydrofuran and an equivalent of n-butyllithium added at -78°C After warming to room temperature (20°C) and cooling to -78°C, an equivalent of compound I is added in tetrahydrofuran. The . 10 mixture is allowed to slowly come to room temperature and to stir overnight. The alpha-bis[trimethylsilane]-protected amine is isolated by evaporating solvent and adding hexane under anhydrous conditions. Insoluble residue is removed by filtration under a nitrogen blanket, yielding a hexane solution of compound II.
Compound III, the N-trimethysilyl protected form of boroProline is obtained by the thermal cyclization of compound II during the distillation process in which compound II is heated to 100-150°C and distillate is collected which boils 66-62°C at 0.06-0.10 mm pressure.
Compound IV, boroProline-pinacol hydrogen chloride, is obtained by treatment of compound III with HCl:dioxane. Excess HCl and by-products are removed by trituration with ether. The final product is obtained in a high degree of purity by recrystallization from ethyl acetate.
The boroProline esters can also be obtained by treatment of the reaction mixture obtained in the preparation of compound II with anhydrous acid to yield 1 amino-4-bromobutyl boronate pinacol as a salt. Cyclization occurs after neutralizing the salt with base and heating the reaction.
Example 2: Preparation of bo~oP~oline pi~cacol The intermediate, 4-Bromo-1-chlorobutyl boronate pinacol, was prepared by the method in Matteson et al. (Organometallics 3:1284, 1984) except that conditions were modified for large scale preparations and pinacol was substituted for the pinanediol protecting group.
3-bromopropyl boronate pinacol was prepared by hydrogenboronation of allyl bromide (173 ml, 2.00 moles) with catechol borane (240 ml, 2.00 moles).
Catechol borane was added to allyl bromide and the reaction heated for 4 hours at 100°C under a nitrogen atmosphere. The product, 3-bromopropyl boronate catechol (bp 95-102°C, 0.25 mm), was isolated in a yield of 49°1° by distillation. The catechol ester (124 g, 0.52 moles) was ~transesterified with pinacol (61.5 g, 0.52 moles) by mixing the component in 50 ml of THF and allowing them to stir for 0.5 hours at 0°C and 0.5 hours at room temperature. Solvent was removed by evaporation and 250 ml of hexane added. Catechol was removed as a crystalline solid. Quantitative removal was achieved by successive dilution to 500 ml and to 1000 ml with hexane and removing crystals at each dilution. Hexane was evaporated and the product distilled to yield 177g (bp 60-64°C, 0.35 mm).
4-Bromo-1-chlorobutyl b0ronate pinacol was prepared by homologation of the corresponding propyl boronate. Methylene chloride (50.54 ml, 0.713 moles) was dissolved in 500 ml of THF, 1.54N n-butyllithium in hexane (480 ml, 0.780 moles) was slowly added at -100°C. 3-Bromopropyl boronate pinacol (178 g, 0.713 moles) was dissolved in 500 ml of THG, cooled to the freezing point of the solution, and added to the reaction mixture. Zinc chloride (54.4 g, 0.392 moles) was dissolved in 250 ml of THG, cooled to 0°C, and added to the reaction mixture in several portions.
The reaction was allowed to slowly warm to room temperature and to stir overnight.
Solvent was evaporated and the residue dissolved in hexane (1 liter) and washed with water (1 liter). Insoluble material was discarded. After drying over anhydrous magnesium sulfate and filtering, solvent was evaporated. The product was distilled to yield 147 g (bp 110-112°C, 0.200 mm).
N-Trimethylsilyl-boroProline pinacol was prepared first by dissolving hexamethyldisilizane (20.0 g, 80.0 mmoles) in 30 ml of THF, cooling the solution to -78°C, and adding 1.62N n-butyllithium in hexane (49.4 ml, 80.0 mmoles).
The solution was allowed to slowly warm to room temperature. It was recooled to -78°C.
and 4-bromo-1-chlorobutyl boronate pinacol (23.9 g, 80.0 mmoles) added in 20 ml of THF. The mixture was allowed to slowly warm to room temperature and to stir overnight. Solvent was removed by evaporation and dry hexane (400 ml) added to yield a precipitant which was removed by filbration under a nitrogen atmosphere. The filtrate was evaporated and the residue distilled, yielding 19.4 g of the desired product (bp 60-62°G, 0.1-0.06 mm).
H-boroProline-pinacol.HC1 (boroProline-pinacol.HC1) was prepared by cooling N-trimethylsilyl-boroProline pinacol (16.0 g, 61.7 mmoles) to -78°C and adding 4N HCL:dioxane 46 ml, 185 mmoles). The mixture was stirred 30 minutes at -78°C and 1 hour at room temperature. Solvent was evaporated and the residue triturated with ether to yield a solid. The crude product was dissolved in chloroform and insoluble material removed by filtration. The solution was evaporated and the product crystallized from ethyl acetate to yield 11.1 g of the desired product (mp 156.5-157°C).
Example 3: Syfzthesis of bo~oProlihe Peptia'es General methods of coupling of N-protected peptides and amino acids with suitable side-chain protecting groups to H-boroProline-pinacol are applicable.
When needed, side-chain protecting and N-terminal protecting groups can be removed by treatment with anhydrous HCI, HBr, trifluoroacetic acid, or by catalytic hydrogenation. These procedures are known to those slcilled in the art of peptide synthesis.
The mixed anhydride procedure of Anderson et al. (J. Am. Chem. Soc.
89:5012, 1984) is preferred for peptide coupling. Referring again to Figure 1, the mixed anhydride of an N-protected amino acid or a peptide is prepared by dissolving the peptide in tetrahydrofuran and adding one equivalent of N-methylmoipholine. The solution is cooled to -20°C and an equivalent of isobutyl chloroformate is added.
After 5 minutes, this mixture and one equivalent of triethylamine (or other sterically hindered base) are added to a solution of H-boroPro-pinacol dissolved in either cold chloroform of tetrahydrofuran.
The reaction mixture is routinely stirred for one hour at -20°C and 1 to 2 hours at room temperature (20°C). Solvent is removed by evaporation, and the residue is dissolved in ethyl acetate. The organic solution is washed with 0.20N
hydrochloric acid, 5% aqueous sodium bicarbonate, and saturated aqueous sodium chloride.
The organic phase is dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered, and evaporated.
Products are purified by either silica gel chromatography or gel permeation chromatography using Sephadex TM LH-20 and methanol as a solvent.
Previous studies have shown that the pinacol protecting group can be removed in situ by preincubation in phosphate buffer prior to running biological experiments (Fettner et al., J. Biol. Chem. 259:15106, 1984). Several other methods are also applicable for removing pinacol groups from peptides, including boroProline, and characterizing the final product. First, the peptide can be treated with diethanolamine to yield the corresponding diethanolamine boronic acid ester, which can be readily hydrolyzed by treatment with aqueous acid or a sulfonic acid substituted polystyrene resin as described in Fettner et al. (supra). Both pinacol and pinanediol protecting groups can be removed by treating with BC13 in methylene chloride as described by Finder et al. (J. Med. Chem. 28:1917). Finally, the free boronic acid can be converted to the difluoroboron derivative (-BF2) by treatment with aqueous HF as described by Finder et al. (supra).
Similarly, different ester groups can be introduced by reacting the free boronic acid with various di-hydroxy compounds (for example, those containing heteroatoms such as S or N) in an inert solvent.
Example 4: Pr~epay~atio~ of H Ala-bo~oPro Boc-Ala-boroPro was prepared by mixed anhydride coupling of the N-Boc-protected alanine and H-boroPro prepared as described above. H-Ala-boroPro (Ala-boroPro) was prepared by removal of the Boc protecting group at 0°C in 3.5 molar excess of 4N HCl-dioxane. The coupling and debloclcing reactions were performed by standard chemical reaction. Ala-boroPro has a Ki for DP-IV of in the nanomolar range. Boc-blocked Ala-boroPro has no affinity for DP-IV.
The two diastereomers of Ala-boroPro-pinacol, L-Ala-D-boroPro-pinacol and L-Ala-L-boroPro-pinacol, can be partially separated by silica gel chromatography with 20% methanol in ethyl acetate as eluant. The early fraction appears by NMR
analysis to be 95% enriched in one isomer. Because this fraction has more inhibits DP-IV to a greater extent than later fractions (at equal concentrations) it is probably enriched in the L-boroPro (L-Ala-L-boroPro-pinacol) isomer.
Example 5: Synthesis of Cyclohexylglycine bof°oAla Referring to Figure 1, a solution of 515 mg (2.00 mmol) of Boc-L-2-(cyclohexyl)glycine 1 CChem-Impex International), 587 mg (2.26 mmol) of HCl.boroAla pinane 2, 332 mg ( 2.46 mmol) of HOBT, and 671 ~L (4.84 mmol) of triethylamine in 6 mL of anlrydrous DMF was treated with 498 mg ( 2.60 mmol) of EDC, and the resulting solution stirred at room temperature under argon for 18 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with a 200 mL of 10% aqueous citric acid and the resulting mixture extracted with 2 x 100 mL of ethyl acetate. The combined extracts were washed with brine, dried (MgS04), filtered, and concentrated to give a clear oil.
The crude oil was chromatographed over silica gel with ethyl acetate/hexane to give the product ester as a clear oil. The oil was then dissolved in hydrogen chloride in diethyl ether (1.0 M solution, 25 mL) and stirred for 48 hours at room temperature.
The mixture was evaporated to dryness in vacuo and redissolved in 25 mL
phenylboronic acid solution (244 mg, 2 mmol) at pH 2 (0.01 N HCl) and ether (25 mL). After stirring for 30 min, the ether layer was removed and replaced with fresh ether (25 mL). This step was repeated for four times. The aqueous phase was then lyophilized and purified by HPLC to afford 170 mg (37%) of the target compound 3.
Example 6: DPIV Assays on Serum Samples f~onz Rats Experiments show that DPIV enzyme activity was significantly decreased in rats treated with Cyclohexylglycine-boroAla. See Figure 7. Four rats were used in this experiment: two females (#3 and #9) and two males (#10 and #11). Blood and plasma samples were collected from rats 1 hour after being treated with Cyclohexylglycine-boroAla. The collected serum samples were evaluated for DPPIV activity of Cyclohexylglycine-boroAla as follows:
1. 2 mg of Ala-Pro-paranitroanalide (substrate) was dissolved in 20 ml 0.1 M
HEPES pH 8, 0.14 M NaCI (buffer).
2. Serum samples were diluted into substrate solution in the wells of a microtiter plate. For each sample, lOuL of serum was diluted into 150 ~L of substrate.
3. A reading of the A410 in each well was recorded immediately after the dilution of serum into substrate, and again after approximately 1 hour. The time of data acquisition for each reading is recorded in the data file by the microplate reader software.
The rate of absorbance change was obtained by subtracting the first reading from the second and dividing by the reaction time to give DeltaA410/hr. The DPIV
activity was plotted in units of DeltaA410 hr'1 ~,L'1.
Example 7: Incidence of Diabetes ih NOD mice upovc t~°eatme~ct with DPIV I~hibito~s The experiment was started on 8-10 week old NOD mice. The mice were lcept under VAF/SPF conditions and fed everyday with either Val-boro-Pro (0.034 mg/lcg) or Cyclohexyl-boro-Ala (0.34 mg/lcg) for 60 days and then observed for the development of spontaneous diabetes. The mice were tested for the excretion of sugar in urine and considered positive for diabetes when sugar was detected in the urine.
The graph shows cumulative incidence of Diabetes over time (Figure 5). One of the interesting features of the NOD mice treated with Val-boro-Pro was that some of the mice that shotwed signs of diabetes got better and recovered. At the end of the experiment, the mice in Val-born-Pro group not only had low incidence of Diabetes (Figure 6) but also showed generally good health compared to the other groups.
All of the above-cited references and publications are hereby incorporated by reference.
Equivale~zts Those slcilled in the art will recognize, or be able to ascertain using no more than routine experimentation, many equivalents to the specific embodiments of the invention described herein. Such equivalents are intended to be encompassed by the following claims.
Claims (43)
1. A method for treating an autoimmune disease in an animal involving tissue which is responsive to a peptide hormone processed by dipeptidylpeptidase IV
(DPIV), comprising administering to said animal a composition comprising one or more inhibitors of DPIV in an amount sufficient to promote tissue regeneration of tissue targeted by the autoimmune disease.
(DPIV), comprising administering to said animal a composition comprising one or more inhibitors of DPIV in an amount sufficient to promote tissue regeneration of tissue targeted by the autoimmune disease.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the autoimmune disease is selected from:
Type I diabetes, septic shock, multiple sclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease (IBD) and Crohn's disease.
Type I diabetes, septic shock, multiple sclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease (IBD) and Crohn's disease.
3. The method of claim 1, wherein the peptide hormone is selected from:
glucagon, glucagon-like peptide-1 (GLP-1), glucagon-like peptide-2 (GLP-2, PG 126-158), glicentin (corresponding to PG 1-69), oxyntomodulin (PG 33-69), glicentin-related pancreatic polypeptide (GRPP, PG 1-30), intervening peptide-2 (IP-2, PG 111-122amide), glucose-dependent insulinotropic peptides, vasoactive intestinal polypeptide (VIP), vasostatin I or II, peptide histidine methionine (PHM), peptide histidine isoleucine (PHI), secretin, gastric inhibitory peptide, gastrin-releasing peptide (GRP), growth hormone-releasing hormone (GHRH), helospectin, helodermin, pituitary adenylate cyclase-activating peptide (PACAP, PACAP 27, and PACAP 38), and PACAP-related peptide (PRP), peptide YY (PYY), neuropeptide Y (NPY), gastric inhibitory peptide (GIP), helodermin, peptide histidine isoleucine (PHI), as well as calcitonin and secretin.
glucagon, glucagon-like peptide-1 (GLP-1), glucagon-like peptide-2 (GLP-2, PG 126-158), glicentin (corresponding to PG 1-69), oxyntomodulin (PG 33-69), glicentin-related pancreatic polypeptide (GRPP, PG 1-30), intervening peptide-2 (IP-2, PG 111-122amide), glucose-dependent insulinotropic peptides, vasoactive intestinal polypeptide (VIP), vasostatin I or II, peptide histidine methionine (PHM), peptide histidine isoleucine (PHI), secretin, gastric inhibitory peptide, gastrin-releasing peptide (GRP), growth hormone-releasing hormone (GHRH), helospectin, helodermin, pituitary adenylate cyclase-activating peptide (PACAP, PACAP 27, and PACAP 38), and PACAP-related peptide (PRP), peptide YY (PYY), neuropeptide Y (NPY), gastric inhibitory peptide (GIP), helodermin, peptide histidine isoleucine (PHI), as well as calcitonin and secretin.
4. The method of claim 1, wherein the inhibitor is peptidomimetic of a peptide selected from the group consisting of Pro-Pro, Ala-Pro, and (D)-Ala-(L)-Ala.
5. The method of claim 1, wherein the inhibitor has a molecular weight less than 7500 amu.
6. The method of claim 1, wherein the inhibitor is orally active.
7. The method of claim 1, wherein the inhibitor is represented by the general formula:
wherein A represents a 4-8-membered heterocycle including the N and the C.alpha., carbon;
Z represents C or N;
W represents a functional group which reacts with an active site residue of the targeted protease, R1 represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C- terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group, or R2 is absent or represents one or more substitutions to the ring A, each of which can independently be a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkenyl, a lower alkenyl, a carbonyl, a thiocarbonyl, an amino, an acylamino, an amido, a cyano, a nitro, an azido, a sulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfonamido, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7;
if X is N, R3 represents hydrogen, if X is C, R3 represents hydrogen or a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkenyl, a lower alkynyl, a carbonyl, a thiocarbonyl, an amino, an acylamino, an amido, a cyano, a nitro, an azido, a sulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfonamido, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7;
R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, an alkynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-alkyl, -(CH2)m S-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkynyl, or -(CH2)m-S-(CH2)m-R7, R7 represents, independently for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
wherein A represents a 4-8-membered heterocycle including the N and the C.alpha., carbon;
Z represents C or N;
W represents a functional group which reacts with an active site residue of the targeted protease, R1 represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C- terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group, or R2 is absent or represents one or more substitutions to the ring A, each of which can independently be a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkenyl, a lower alkenyl, a carbonyl, a thiocarbonyl, an amino, an acylamino, an amido, a cyano, a nitro, an azido, a sulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfonamido, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7;
if X is N, R3 represents hydrogen, if X is C, R3 represents hydrogen or a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkenyl, a lower alkynyl, a carbonyl, a thiocarbonyl, an amino, an acylamino, an amido, a cyano, a nitro, an azido, a sulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfonamido, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7;
R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, an alkynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-alkyl, -(CH2)m S-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkynyl, or -(CH2)m-S-(CH2)m-R7, R7 represents, independently for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
8. The method of claim 7, wherein W represents -CN, -CH=NR5, R5 represents H, an alkyl, an alkenyl, an alkynyl, -C(X1)(X2)X3, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-OH, -(CH2)n-O-alkyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-SH, -(CH2)n-S-alkyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7, -C(O)C(O)NH2, -C(O)C(O)OR'7;
R7 represents, independently for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R'7 represents, for each occurrence, hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle; and Y1 and Y2 can, independently, be OH, or a group capable of being hydrolyzed to a hydroxyl group, including cyclic derivatives where Y1 and Y2 taken together form a ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure, R50 represents O or S;
R51 represents N3, SH2, NH2, NO2 or OR'7;
R52 represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl, an amine, OR'7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R51 and R52 taken together with the phosphorous atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure X1 represents a halogen;
X2 and X3 each represent, independently, a hydrogen or a halogen.
R7 represents, independently for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R'7 represents, for each occurrence, hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle; and Y1 and Y2 can, independently, be OH, or a group capable of being hydrolyzed to a hydroxyl group, including cyclic derivatives where Y1 and Y2 taken together form a ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure, R50 represents O or S;
R51 represents N3, SH2, NH2, NO2 or OR'7;
R52 represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl, an amine, OR'7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R51 and R52 taken together with the phosphorous atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure X1 represents a halogen;
X2 and X3 each represent, independently, a hydrogen or a halogen.
9. The method of claim 8, wherein the ring A is represented by the formula wherein n is an integer of 1 or 2.
10. The method of claim 8, wherein W represents
11. The method of claim 8, wherein R1 represents wherein R36 is a small hydrophobic group and R38 is hydrogen, or, R36 and R38 together form a 4-7-membered heterocycle including the N and the C.alpha.
carbon, as defined for A above; and R40 represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or, a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group.
carbon, as defined for A above; and R40 represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or, a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group.
12. The method of claim 8, wherein R2 is absent, or represents a small hydrophobic group.
13. The method of claim 8, wherein R3 is a hydrogen, or a small hydrophobic group.
14. The method of claim 8, wherein R5 is a hydrogen, or a halogentated lower alkyl.
15. The method of claim 8, wherein X1 is a fluorine, and X2 and X3, if halogens, are fluorine.
16. The method of claim 1, wherein the inhibitor is represented by the general formula:
wherein R1 represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group, or R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, an alkynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-S-(CH2)m-R7, R7 represents an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloalkenyl, or a heterocycle;
R8 and R9 each, independently, represent hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, -(CH2)m-R7, -C(=O)-alkyl, -C(=O)-alkenyl, -C(=O)-alkynyl, -C(=O)-(CH2)m-R7, or R8 and R9 taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
R11 and R12 each, independently, represent hydrogen, a alkyl, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R11 and R12 taken together with the O-B-O atoms to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
wherein R1 represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group, or R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, an alkynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-S-(CH2)m-R7, R7 represents an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloalkenyl, or a heterocycle;
R8 and R9 each, independently, represent hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, -(CH2)m-R7, -C(=O)-alkyl, -C(=O)-alkenyl, -C(=O)-alkynyl, -C(=O)-(CH2)m-R7, or R8 and R9 taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
R11 and R12 each, independently, represent hydrogen, a alkyl, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R11 and R12 taken together with the O-B-O atoms to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
17. The method of claim 1, wherein the inhibitor is represented by the general formula wherein, R1 represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group, or R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a alkyl, a alkenyl, a alkynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-S-(CH2)m-R7, R7 represents an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloalkenyl, or a heterocycle;
R8 and R9 each independently represent hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, -(CH2)m-R7, -C(=O)-alkyl, -C(=O)-alkenyl, -C(=O)-alkynyl, -C(=O)-(CH2)m-R7, or R8 and R9 taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
and m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
R8 and R9 each independently represent hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, -(CH2)m-R7, -C(=O)-alkyl, -C(=O)-alkenyl, -C(=O)-alkynyl, -C(=O)-(CH2)m-R7, or R8 and R9 taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
and m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
18. The method of claim 1, wherein the inhibitor is represented by the general formula:
wherein R1 represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C- terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group, or R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, an alkynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-S-(CH2)m-R7, R7 represents, independently for each occurrence, an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloalkenyl, or a heterocycle;
R8 and R9 each independently represent hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, -(CH2)m-R7, -C(=O)-alkyl, -C(=O)-alkenyl, -C(=O)-alkynyl, -C(=O)-(CH2)m-R7, or R8 and R9 taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
X1, X2 and X3 each represent a hydrogen or a halogen; and m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
wherein R1 represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C- terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group, or R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, an alkynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-S-(CH2)m-R7, R7 represents, independently for each occurrence, an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloalkenyl, or a heterocycle;
R8 and R9 each independently represent hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, -(CH2)m-R7, -C(=O)-alkyl, -C(=O)-alkenyl, -C(=O)-alkynyl, -C(=O)-(CH2)m-R7, or R8 and R9 taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
X1, X2 and X3 each represent a hydrogen or a halogen; and m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
19. The method of claim 1, wherein the inhibitor is represented by the general formula:
wherein R32 is a small hydrophobic group; and R30 represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group.
wherein R32 is a small hydrophobic group; and R30 represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group.
20. The method of claim 1, wherein the inhibitor is represented by the general formula:
wherein W represents a functional group which reacts with an active site residue of the targeted protease, as for example, -CN, -CH=NR5, R1 represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or R3 represents hydrogen or a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkenyl, a lower alkynyl, a carbonyl, a thiocarbonyl, an amino, an acylamino, an amido, a cyano, a nitro, an azido, a sulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfonamido, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7;
R5 represents H, an alkyl, an alkenyl, an alkynyl, -C(X1)(X2)X3, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-OH, -(CH2)n-O-alkyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-SH, -(CH2)n-S-alkyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7, -C(O)C(O)NH2, -C(O)C(O)OR'7;
R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, an alkynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-S-(CH2)m-R7, R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R'7 represents, for each occurrence, hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R61 and R62, independently, represent small hydrophobic groups;
Y1 and Y2 can, independently, be OH, or a group capable of being hydrolyzed to a hydroxyl group, including cyclic derivatives where Y1 and Y2 taken together form a ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure, R50 represents O or S;
R51 represents N3, SH2, NH2, NO2 or OR'7;
R52 represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl, an amine, OR'7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R51 and R52 taken together with the phosphorous atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure X1 represents a halogen;
X2 and X3 each, independently, represent a hydrogen or a halogen;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
wherein W represents a functional group which reacts with an active site residue of the targeted protease, as for example, -CN, -CH=NR5, R1 represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or R3 represents hydrogen or a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkenyl, a lower alkynyl, a carbonyl, a thiocarbonyl, an amino, an acylamino, an amido, a cyano, a nitro, an azido, a sulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfonamido, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7;
R5 represents H, an alkyl, an alkenyl, an alkynyl, -C(X1)(X2)X3, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-OH, -(CH2)n-O-alkyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-SH, -(CH2)n-S-alkyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7, -C(O)C(O)NH2, -C(O)C(O)OR'7;
R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, an alkynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-S-(CH2)m-R7, R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R'7 represents, for each occurrence, hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R61 and R62, independently, represent small hydrophobic groups;
Y1 and Y2 can, independently, be OH, or a group capable of being hydrolyzed to a hydroxyl group, including cyclic derivatives where Y1 and Y2 taken together form a ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure, R50 represents O or S;
R51 represents N3, SH2, NH2, NO2 or OR'7;
R52 represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl, an amine, OR'7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R51 and R52 taken together with the phosphorous atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure X1 represents a halogen;
X2 and X3 each, independently, represent a hydrogen or a halogen;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
21. The method of claim 4, wherein the boronyl peptidomimetic is represented in the general formula:
wherein each A independently represents a 4-8 membered heterocycle including the N and the C.alpha. carbon;
R2 is absent or represents one or more substitutions to the ring A, each of which can independently be a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkenyl, a lower alkynyl, a carbonyl, a thiocarbonyl, an amino, an acylamino, an amido, a cyano, a nitro, an azido, a sulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfonamido, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7;
R3 represents hydrogen or a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkenyl, a lower alkynyl, a carbonyl, a thiocarbonyl, an amino, an acylamino, an amido, a cyano, a nitro, an azido, a sulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfonamido, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)m-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7;
R5 represents H, an alkyl, an alkenyl, an alkynyl, -C(X1)(X2)X3, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-OH, -(CH2)n-O-alkyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-SH, -(CH2)n-S-alkyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7, -C(O)C(O)NH2, -C(O)C(O)OR'7;
R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a alkyl, a alkenyl, a alkynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-S-(CH2)m-R7, R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R30 represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group, or R32 and R61, independently, represent small hydrophobic groups, preferably lower alkyls, and more preferably methyl;
Y1 and Y2 can, independently, be OH, or a group capable of being hydrolyzed to a hydroxyl group, including cyclic derivatives where Y1 and Y2 taken together form a ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure, m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
wherein each A independently represents a 4-8 membered heterocycle including the N and the C.alpha. carbon;
R2 is absent or represents one or more substitutions to the ring A, each of which can independently be a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkenyl, a lower alkynyl, a carbonyl, a thiocarbonyl, an amino, an acylamino, an amido, a cyano, a nitro, an azido, a sulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfonamido, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7;
R3 represents hydrogen or a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkenyl, a lower alkynyl, a carbonyl, a thiocarbonyl, an amino, an acylamino, an amido, a cyano, a nitro, an azido, a sulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfonamido, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)m-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7;
R5 represents H, an alkyl, an alkenyl, an alkynyl, -C(X1)(X2)X3, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-OH, -(CH2)n-O-alkyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-SH, -(CH2)n-S-alkyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7, -C(O)C(O)NH2, -C(O)C(O)OR'7;
R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a alkyl, a alkenyl, a alkynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-S-(CH2)m-R7, R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R30 represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group, or R32 and R61, independently, represent small hydrophobic groups, preferably lower alkyls, and more preferably methyl;
Y1 and Y2 can, independently, be OH, or a group capable of being hydrolyzed to a hydroxyl group, including cyclic derivatives where Y1 and Y2 taken together form a ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure, m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
22. The method of claim 1, wherein the inhibitor is represented by the general formula:
wherein:
R1 represents hydrogen, halogen or lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, or lower alkynyl;
R2 represents a branched lower alkyl, aralkyl, aryl, heteroaralkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or cycloalkylalkyl;
R3 represents hydrogen or an amino-protecting group;
R4 represents hydrogen, a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, an amino-protecting group, or R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a alkyl, a alkenyl, a alkynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-S-(CH2)m-R7;
R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R'7 represents, for each occurrence, hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
U is absent or represents -C(=O)-, -C(=S)-, -P(=O)(OR8)-, -S(O2)-, or -S(O)-;
W represents a functional group which reacts with an active site residue of the targeted protease.
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
wherein:
R1 represents hydrogen, halogen or lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, or lower alkynyl;
R2 represents a branched lower alkyl, aralkyl, aryl, heteroaralkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or cycloalkylalkyl;
R3 represents hydrogen or an amino-protecting group;
R4 represents hydrogen, a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, an amino-protecting group, or R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a alkyl, a alkenyl, a alkynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-S-(CH2)m-R7;
R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R'7 represents, for each occurrence, hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
U is absent or represents -C(=O)-, -C(=S)-, -P(=O)(OR8)-, -S(O2)-, or -S(O)-;
W represents a functional group which reacts with an active site residue of the targeted protease.
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
23. The method of claim 22, wherein:
W represents -CN, -CH=NR53, Y1 and Y2 are, independently, OH, or a group capable of being hydrolyzed to a hydroxyl group;
U represents -C(=O)-, -C(=S)-, or -S(O2)-;
R50 represents O or S;
R51 represents N3, SH, NH2, NO2 or OR'7;
R52 represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl, an amine, OR'7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R51 and R52 taken together with the phosphorous atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
R53, represents hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, an alkynyl, -C(X1)(X2)-X3, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-OH, -(CH2)n-O-alkyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-SH, -(CH2)n-S-alkyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7, -C(O)C(O)NH2, -C(O)C(O)OR'7;
X1 represents a halogen;
X2 and X3 each represent a hydrogen or a halogen;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
W represents -CN, -CH=NR53, Y1 and Y2 are, independently, OH, or a group capable of being hydrolyzed to a hydroxyl group;
U represents -C(=O)-, -C(=S)-, or -S(O2)-;
R50 represents O or S;
R51 represents N3, SH, NH2, NO2 or OR'7;
R52 represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl, an amine, OR'7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R51 and R52 taken together with the phosphorous atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
R53, represents hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, an alkynyl, -C(X1)(X2)-X3, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-OH, -(CH2)n-O-alkyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-SH, -(CH2)n-S-alkyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7, -C(O)C(O)NH2, -C(O)C(O)OR'7;
X1 represents a halogen;
X2 and X3 each represent a hydrogen or a halogen;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
24. The method of claim 1, wherein the inhibitor is represented by the general formula:
wherein:
W represents -CN, -CH=NR53, Y1 and Y2 are, independently, OH, or a group capable of being hydrolyzed to a hydroxyl group.
R50 represents O or S;
R51 represents N3, SH, NH2, NO2 or OR'7;
R52 represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl, an amine, OR'7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R51 and R52 taken together with the phosphorous atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
R53 represents hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, an alkynyl, -C(X1)(X2)-X3, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-OH, -(CH2)n-O-alkyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-SH, -(CH2)n-S-alkyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7, -C(O)C(O)NH2, -C(O)C(O)OR'7;
X1 represents a halogen;
X2 and X3 each represent a hydrogen or a halogen;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
wherein:
W represents -CN, -CH=NR53, Y1 and Y2 are, independently, OH, or a group capable of being hydrolyzed to a hydroxyl group.
R50 represents O or S;
R51 represents N3, SH, NH2, NO2 or OR'7;
R52 represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl, an amine, OR'7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R51 and R52 taken together with the phosphorous atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
R53 represents hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, an alkynyl, -C(X1)(X2)-X3, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-OH, -(CH2)n-O-alkyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-SH, -(CH2)n-S-alkyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7, -C(O)C(O)NH2, -C(O)C(O)OR'7;
X1 represents a halogen;
X2 and X3 each represent a hydrogen or a halogen;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
25. The method of claim 24, wherein the Y1 and Y2 are connected via a ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure.
26. The method of claim 25, wherein the Y1 and Y2 are pinacol.
27. The method of claim 24, wherein:
W represents R53 represents hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, an alkynyl, -C(X1)(X2)-X3, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-OH, -(CH2)n-O-alkyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-SH, -(CH2)n-S-alkyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7, -C(O)C(O)NH2, -C(O)C(O)OR'7;
R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R'7 represents, for each occurrence, hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
X1 represents a halogen;
X2 arid X3, independently and for each occurrence, represent a hydrogen or a halogen;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
W represents R53 represents hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, an alkynyl, -C(X1)(X2)-X3, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-OH, -(CH2)n-O-alkyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-SH, -(CH2)n-S-alkyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7, -C(O)C(O)NH2, -C(O)C(O)OR'7;
R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R'7 represents, for each occurrence, hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
X1 represents a halogen;
X2 arid X3, independently and for each occurrence, represent a hydrogen or a halogen;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
28. The method of claim 27, wherein:
X1 represents fluorine;
X2 and X3 each independently represent a hydrogen or a fluorine.
X1 represents fluorine;
X2 and X3 each independently represent a hydrogen or a fluorine.
29. The method of claim 24, wherein R4 represents wherein:
R36 is a small hydrophobic group and R38 is hydrogen, or, R36 and R38 together form a 4-7 membered heterocycle; and R40 represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group.
R36 is a small hydrophobic group and R38 is hydrogen, or, R36 and R38 together form a 4-7 membered heterocycle; and R40 represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, or a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, or an amino-protecting group.
30. The method of claim 24, wherein R1 represents a lower alkyl.
31. The method of claim 30, wherein R1 represents a methyl.
32. The method of claim 24, wherein R2 represents a bulky hydrophobic group.
33. The method of claim 32, wherein the bulky hydrophobic group is a branched alkyl, branched alkenyl, branched alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, cycloalkynyl, bicycloalkyl, bicycloalkenyl or bicycloalkynyl.
34. The method of claim 33, wherein the bulky hydrophobic group is a t-butyl or cyclohexyl.
35. The method of claim 24, wherein R3 represents hydrogen.
36. The method of claim 24, wherein R53 is a hydrogen, or a halogentated lower alkyl.
37. The method of claim 24, wherein X1 is a fluorine, and X2 and X3, if halogens, are fluorine.
38. The method of claim 24, represented by the general formula:
wherein;
R1 represents hydrogen, halogen or lower alkyl, lower alkenyl; or lower alkynyl;
R2 represents a branched lower alkyl, aralkyl, aryl, heteroaralkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or cycloalkylalkyl;
R3 represents hydrogen or an amino-protecting group;
R4 represents hydrogen, a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, an amino-protecting group, or R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a alkyl, a alkenyl, a alkynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-S-(CH2)m-R7;R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R'7 represents, for each occurrence, hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R11 and R12, independently each represent hydrogen, a alkyl, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R11 and R12 taken together with the O-B-O atoms to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
wherein;
R1 represents hydrogen, halogen or lower alkyl, lower alkenyl; or lower alkynyl;
R2 represents a branched lower alkyl, aralkyl, aryl, heteroaralkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or cycloalkylalkyl;
R3 represents hydrogen or an amino-protecting group;
R4 represents hydrogen, a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, an amino-protecting group, or R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a alkyl, a alkenyl, a alkynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-S-(CH2)m-R7;R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R'7 represents, for each occurrence, hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R11 and R12, independently each represent hydrogen, a alkyl, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R11 and R12 taken together with the O-B-O atoms to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
39. The method of claim 38, wherein:
R1 represents methyl;
R2 represents cyclohexyl;
R3, R4, R11 and R12 represent, independently and for each occurrence, hydrogen.
R1 represents methyl;
R2 represents cyclohexyl;
R3, R4, R11 and R12 represent, independently and for each occurrence, hydrogen.
40. The method of claim 24, represented by the general formula:
wherein, R1 represents hydrogen, halogen or lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, or lower alkynyl;
R2, represents a branched lower alkyl, aralkyl, aryl, heteroaralkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or cycloalkylalkyl;
R3 represents hydrogen or an amino-protecting group;
R4 represents hydrogen, a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, an amino-protecting group, or R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a alkyl, a alkenyl, a alkynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-S-(CH2)m-R7;R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R'7 represents, for each occurrence, hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle.
wherein, R1 represents hydrogen, halogen or lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, or lower alkynyl;
R2, represents a branched lower alkyl, aralkyl, aryl, heteroaralkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or cycloalkylalkyl;
R3 represents hydrogen or an amino-protecting group;
R4 represents hydrogen, a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, an amino-protecting group, or R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a alkyl, a alkenyl, a alkynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-S-(CH2)m-R7;R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R'7 represents, for each occurrence, hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle.
41. The method of claim 24, represented by the general formula:
wherein:
R1 represents hydrogen, halogen or lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, or lower alkynyl;
R2 represents a branched lower alkyl, aralkyl, aryl, heteroaralkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or cycloalkylalkyl;
R3 represents hydrogen or an amino-protecting group;
R4 represents hydrogen, a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, an amino-protecting group, or R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a alkyl, a alkenyl, a alkynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-S-(CH2)m-R7;R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R'7 represents, for each occurrence, hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
X1, X2 and X3 each represent a hydrogen or a halogen.
wherein:
R1 represents hydrogen, halogen or lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, or lower alkynyl;
R2 represents a branched lower alkyl, aralkyl, aryl, heteroaralkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or cycloalkylalkyl;
R3 represents hydrogen or an amino-protecting group;
R4 represents hydrogen, a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, an amino-protecting group, or R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a alkyl, a alkenyl, a alkynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-S-(CH2)m-R7;R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R'7 represents, for each occurrence, hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
X1, X2 and X3 each represent a hydrogen or a halogen.
42. The method of claim 24, wherein the (L)-Ala, (L)-Xaa-diastereomer of the inhibitor is represented by the general formula:
wherein:
R2 represents a branched lower alkyl, aralkyl, aryl, heteroaralkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or cycloalkylalkyl, e.g., optionally substituted by one or more substitutents such as halogen, hydroxy, alkoxy, etc., R3 represents hydrogen or an amino-protecting group;
R4 represents hydrogen, a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, an amino-protecting group, or R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a alkyl, a alkenyl, a alkynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-S-(CH2)m-R7;
R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R'7 represents, for each occurrence, hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
W represents -CN, -CH=NR53, Y1 and Y2are, independently, OH, or a group capable of being hydrolyzed to a hydroxyl group;
R50 represents O or S;
R51 represents N3, SH, NH2, NO2 or OR'7;
R52 represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl, an amine, OR'7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R51 and R52 taken together with the phosphorous atom to which they axe attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
R53 represents hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, an alkynyl, -C(X1)(X2)-X3, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-OH, -(CH2)n-O-alkyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-SH, -(CH2)n-S-alkyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7, -C(O)C(O)NH2, C(O)C(O)OR'7;
X1 represents a halogen;
X2 and X3 each represent a hydrogen or a halogen;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
wherein:
R2 represents a branched lower alkyl, aralkyl, aryl, heteroaralkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or cycloalkylalkyl, e.g., optionally substituted by one or more substitutents such as halogen, hydroxy, alkoxy, etc., R3 represents hydrogen or an amino-protecting group;
R4 represents hydrogen, a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or amino acid analog, a C-terminally linked peptide or peptide analog, an amino-protecting group, or R6 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a alkyl, a alkenyl, a alkynyl, an aryl, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)m-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)m-S-(CH2)m-R7;
R7 represents, for each occurrence, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
R'7 represents, for each occurrence, hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or heterocycle;
W represents -CN, -CH=NR53, Y1 and Y2are, independently, OH, or a group capable of being hydrolyzed to a hydroxyl group;
R50 represents O or S;
R51 represents N3, SH, NH2, NO2 or OR'7;
R52 represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl, an amine, OR'7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R51 and R52 taken together with the phosphorous atom to which they axe attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
R53 represents hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, an alkynyl, -C(X1)(X2)-X3, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-OH, -(CH2)n-O-alkyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)n-SH, -(CH2)n-S-alkyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-alkynyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7, -C(O)C(O)NH2, C(O)C(O)OR'7;
X1 represents a halogen;
X2 and X3 each represent a hydrogen or a halogen;
m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
43. The method of claim 42, wherein:
W represents Y1 and Y2 represent independently each a hydroxyl;
R2 represents cyclohexyl;
R3, R4, represent, independently and for each occurrence, hydrogen.
W represents Y1 and Y2 represent independently each a hydroxyl;
R2 represents cyclohexyl;
R3, R4, represent, independently and for each occurrence, hydrogen.
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US33369101P | 2001-11-26 | 2001-11-26 | |
US60/333,691 | 2001-11-26 | ||
PCT/US2002/038347 WO2003045228A2 (en) | 2001-11-26 | 2002-11-26 | Methods for treating autoimmune disorders, and reagents related thereto |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
CA2466870A1 true CA2466870A1 (en) | 2003-06-05 |
Family
ID=23303859
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
CA002466870A Abandoned CA2466870A1 (en) | 2001-11-26 | 2002-11-26 | Methods for treating autoimmune disorders, and reagents related thereto |
Country Status (6)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (2) | US8410053B2 (en) |
EP (2) | EP2769715A3 (en) |
JP (4) | JP2005511636A (en) |
AU (1) | AU2002360453C1 (en) |
CA (1) | CA2466870A1 (en) |
WO (1) | WO2003045228A2 (en) |
Cited By (16)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
EP2116235A1 (en) | 2005-01-10 | 2009-11-11 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Combination therapy for the treatment of diabetes and conditions related thereto and for the treatment of conditions ameliorated by increasing a blood GLP-1 level |
US7816364B2 (en) | 2006-04-11 | 2010-10-19 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | GRP119 receptor agonists in methods of increasing bone mass and of treating osteoporosis and other conditions characterized by low bone mass, and combination therapy relating thereto |
US7833730B2 (en) | 2006-04-11 | 2010-11-16 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Methods of using GPR119 to identify compounds useful for increasing bone mass in an individual |
US7838254B2 (en) | 2008-04-07 | 2010-11-23 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Methods of using GPR119 to identify peptide YY (PYY) secretagogues and compounds useful in the treatment of conditions modulated by PYY |
WO2011005929A1 (en) | 2009-07-09 | 2011-01-13 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Piperidine derivative and its use for the treatment of diabets and obesity |
WO2011127051A1 (en) | 2010-04-06 | 2011-10-13 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
WO2012040279A1 (en) | 2010-09-22 | 2012-03-29 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
WO2012135570A1 (en) | 2011-04-01 | 2012-10-04 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
WO2012145361A1 (en) | 2011-04-19 | 2012-10-26 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
WO2012145603A1 (en) | 2011-04-22 | 2012-10-26 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
WO2012145604A1 (en) | 2011-04-22 | 2012-10-26 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
WO2012170702A1 (en) | 2011-06-08 | 2012-12-13 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
WO2013055910A1 (en) | 2011-10-12 | 2013-04-18 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
WO2014074668A1 (en) | 2012-11-08 | 2014-05-15 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of gpr119 and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
US10555929B2 (en) | 2015-03-09 | 2020-02-11 | Coherus Biosciences, Inc. | Methods for the treatment of nonalcoholic fatty liver disease and/or lipodystrophy |
US11253508B2 (en) | 2017-04-03 | 2022-02-22 | Coherus Biosciences, Inc. | PPARy agonist for treatment of progressive supranuclear palsy |
Families Citing this family (53)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
BR9813233A (en) * | 1997-09-29 | 2000-08-22 | Point Therapeutics Inc | Stimulation of hematopoietic cells in vitro |
US6979697B1 (en) * | 1998-08-21 | 2005-12-27 | Point Therapeutics, Inc. | Regulation of substrate activity |
US6890904B1 (en) | 1999-05-25 | 2005-05-10 | Point Therapeutics, Inc. | Anti-tumor agents |
US7727964B2 (en) | 2001-11-26 | 2010-06-01 | Trustees Of Tufts College | Peptidomimetic inhibitors of post-proline cleaving enzymes |
JP2005531540A (en) * | 2002-04-30 | 2005-10-20 | トラスティーズ・オブ・タフツ・カレッジ | Smart prodrug of serine protease inhibitor |
JP2006506442A (en) * | 2002-07-09 | 2006-02-23 | ポイント セラピューティクス, インコーポレイテッド | Boroproline compound combination therapy |
US7407955B2 (en) | 2002-08-21 | 2008-08-05 | Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma Gmbh & Co., Kg | 8-[3-amino-piperidin-1-yl]-xanthines, the preparation thereof and their use as pharmaceutical compositions |
US7550590B2 (en) | 2003-03-25 | 2009-06-23 | Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
DE10330842A1 (en) | 2003-07-08 | 2005-02-10 | Institut für Medizintechnologie Magdeburg GmbH, IMTM | Use of the inhibitors of enzymes with activities of aminopeptidase N and / or dipeptidyl peptidase IV and pharmaceutical preparations thereof for the therapy and prevention of dermatological diseases with hyperproliferation and altered differentiation states of fibroblasts |
US7169926B1 (en) | 2003-08-13 | 2007-01-30 | Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
ZA200602051B (en) | 2003-08-13 | 2007-10-31 | Takeda Pharmaceutical | 4-pyrimidone derivatives and their use as peptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
US7678909B1 (en) | 2003-08-13 | 2010-03-16 | Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
WO2005026148A1 (en) | 2003-09-08 | 2005-03-24 | Takeda San Diego, Inc. | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
PL1689757T3 (en) * | 2003-11-12 | 2015-05-29 | Sino Med Int Alliance Inc | Heterocyclic boronic acid compounds |
CN1894261B (en) * | 2003-11-12 | 2012-12-05 | 芬诺密克斯公司 | Heterocyclic boronic acid compounds |
US7317109B2 (en) | 2003-11-12 | 2008-01-08 | Phenomix Corporation | Pyrrolidine compounds and methods for selective inhibition of dipeptidyl peptidase-IV |
RU2379315C2 (en) * | 2004-02-23 | 2010-01-20 | Трастиз Оф Тафтс Колледж | Dipeptidyl peptidase iv inhibitors |
US7732446B1 (en) | 2004-03-11 | 2010-06-08 | Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
CN102127053A (en) | 2004-03-15 | 2011-07-20 | 武田药品工业株式会社 | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
US7687638B2 (en) | 2004-06-04 | 2010-03-30 | Takeda San Diego, Inc. | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
WO2006019965A2 (en) | 2004-07-16 | 2006-02-23 | Takeda San Diego, Inc. | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
US20060063719A1 (en) * | 2004-09-21 | 2006-03-23 | Point Therapeutics, Inc. | Methods for treating diabetes |
US7872124B2 (en) | 2004-12-21 | 2011-01-18 | Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
JP2006306770A (en) * | 2005-04-27 | 2006-11-09 | Nidek Co Ltd | Ocular disease remedy |
US7825139B2 (en) | 2005-05-25 | 2010-11-02 | Forest Laboratories Holdings Limited (BM) | Compounds and methods for selective inhibition of dipeptidyl peptidase-IV |
DK1942898T4 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2014-06-02 | Takeda Pharmaceutical | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors for the treatment of diabetes |
KR101368988B1 (en) | 2005-09-16 | 2014-02-28 | 다케다 야쿠힌 고교 가부시키가이샤 | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
WO2007061434A2 (en) * | 2005-11-10 | 2007-05-31 | Nastech Pharmaceutical Company Inc. | A pharmaceutical formulation of glp-1 and its use for treating a metabolic syndrome |
AU2006339348B2 (en) * | 2005-12-19 | 2013-01-17 | Trustees Of Tufts College | Soft protease inhibitors and pro-soft forms thereof |
NO347644B1 (en) | 2006-05-04 | 2024-02-12 | Boehringer Ingelheim Int | Polymorphs |
PE20080251A1 (en) | 2006-05-04 | 2008-04-25 | Boehringer Ingelheim Int | USES OF DPP IV INHIBITORS |
US8324383B2 (en) | 2006-09-13 | 2012-12-04 | Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited | Methods of making polymorphs of benzoate salt of 2-[[6-[(3R)-3-amino-1-piperidinyl]-3,4-dihydro-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1(2H)-pyrimidinyl]methyl]-benzonitrile |
JO3598B1 (en) | 2006-10-10 | 2020-07-05 | Infinity Discovery Inc | Boronic acids and esters as inhibitors of fatty acid amide hydrolase |
TW200838536A (en) | 2006-11-29 | 2008-10-01 | Takeda Pharmaceutical | Polymorphs of succinate salt of 2-[6-(3-amino-piperidin-1-yl)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrimidin-1-ylmethy]-4-fluor-benzonitrile and methods of use therefor |
US8093236B2 (en) | 2007-03-13 | 2012-01-10 | Takeda Pharmaceuticals Company Limited | Weekly administration of dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
JP5395794B2 (en) * | 2007-09-11 | 2014-01-22 | モンドバイオテック ラボラトリーズ アクチエンゲゼルシャフト | Use of galanin peptides as therapeutic agents |
WO2009033819A2 (en) * | 2007-09-11 | 2009-03-19 | Mondobiotech Laboratories Ag | Use of a peptide as a therapeutic agent |
JP2010539057A (en) * | 2007-09-11 | 2010-12-16 | モンドバイオテック ラボラトリーズ アクチエンゲゼルシャフト | Use of human pancreatic polypeptides as therapeutic agents |
WO2009033739A2 (en) * | 2007-09-11 | 2009-03-19 | Mondobiotech Laboratories Ag | Use of a peptide as a therapeutic agent |
RU2010114018A (en) * | 2007-09-11 | 2011-10-20 | Мондобайотек Лабораториз Аг (Li) | APPLICATION OF THYMOSINE BETA 4 PEPTID INDIVIDUALLY OR IN COMBINATION WITH CECROPINE A AS A THERAPEUTIC |
AR071175A1 (en) | 2008-04-03 | 2010-06-02 | Boehringer Ingelheim Int | PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION THAT INCLUDES AN INHIBITOR OF DIPEPTIDIL-PEPTIDASA-4 (DPP4) AND A COMPARING PHARMACO |
TW201000107A (en) | 2008-04-09 | 2010-01-01 | Infinity Pharmaceuticals Inc | Inhibitors of fatty acid amide hydrolase |
JP5493234B2 (en) * | 2008-05-15 | 2014-05-14 | 国立大学法人 岡山大学 | Prevention and treatment of metabolic syndrome by inhibition of PSGL-1 |
KR20200118243A (en) | 2008-08-06 | 2020-10-14 | 베링거 인겔하임 인터내셔날 게엠베하 | Treatment for diabetes in patients inappropriate for metformin therapy |
US20200155558A1 (en) | 2018-11-20 | 2020-05-21 | Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh | Treatment for diabetes in patients with insufficient glycemic control despite therapy with an oral antidiabetic drug |
AU2010323068B2 (en) | 2009-11-27 | 2015-09-03 | Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh | Treatment of genotyped diabetic patients with DPP-IV inhibitors such as linagliptin |
CA2788587C (en) | 2010-02-03 | 2020-03-10 | Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Fatty acid amide hydrolase inhibitors |
WO2011138421A1 (en) | 2010-05-05 | 2011-11-10 | Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh | Combination therapy |
AR083878A1 (en) | 2010-11-15 | 2013-03-27 | Boehringer Ingelheim Int | VASOPROTECTORA AND CARDIOPROTECTORA ANTIDIABETIC THERAPY, LINAGLIPTINA, TREATMENT METHOD |
HUE060305T2 (en) | 2011-08-30 | 2023-02-28 | Tufts College | Fap-activated proteasome inhibitors for treating solid tumors |
EP2849755A1 (en) | 2012-05-14 | 2015-03-25 | Boehringer Ingelheim International GmbH | A xanthine derivative as dpp -4 inhibitor for use in the treatment of podocytes related disorders and/or nephrotic syndrome |
WO2013171166A1 (en) * | 2012-05-14 | 2013-11-21 | Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh | A xanthine derivative as dpp-4 inhibitor for use in the treatment of sirs and/or sepsis |
AU2023219870B1 (en) * | 2023-02-13 | 2024-02-08 | Affiliated Hospital Of Nantong University | Novel use of dpp-4 inhibitor in manufacture of drug for treatment of lupus nephritis |
Family Cites Families (46)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
IT1164225B (en) * | 1983-05-13 | 1987-04-08 | Anic Spa | INVERTED ANALOGS OF PENTAPEPTIDE ENHANCING BRADICHINA BPP5A AND METHODS FOR THEIR PREPARATION |
SE8702550D0 (en) | 1987-06-18 | 1987-06-18 | Anders Grubb | CYSTEINPROTEASHEMMARE |
US4935493A (en) | 1987-10-06 | 1990-06-19 | E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company | Protease inhibitors |
ZA897515B (en) | 1988-10-07 | 1990-06-27 | Merrell Dow Pharma | Novel peptidase inhibitors |
IT1227907B (en) | 1988-12-23 | 1991-05-14 | Eniricerche S P A Milano Sclav | PROCEDURE FOR THE SYNTHESIS OF RETRO-REVERSE AND NEW INTERMEDIATE PEPTIDES IN THIS PROCEDURE |
JP2701932B2 (en) | 1989-04-10 | 1998-01-21 | サントリー株式会社 | Protease inhibitor |
ES2099158T3 (en) | 1990-04-14 | 1997-05-16 | New England Medical Center Inc | TREATMENT OF REJECTION OF TRANSPLANTS OR AUTOIMMUNE DISEASES AND COMPLEX OF THE GENERAL FORMULA X-PRO-Y-BOROPRO ASSOCIATED WITH THE SAME. |
US5462928A (en) * | 1990-04-14 | 1995-10-31 | New England Medical Center Hospitals, Inc. | Inhibitors of dipeptidyl-aminopeptidase type IV |
CA2121369C (en) | 1991-10-22 | 2003-04-29 | William W. Bachovchin | Inhibitors of dipeptidyl-aminopeptidase type iv |
US6825169B1 (en) * | 1991-10-22 | 2004-11-30 | Trustees Of Tufts College | Inhibitors of dipeptidyl-aminopeptidase type IV |
DK36392D0 (en) * | 1992-03-19 | 1992-03-19 | Novo Nordisk As | USE OF CHEMICAL COMPOUND |
US5296604A (en) | 1992-05-15 | 1994-03-22 | Miles Inc. | Proline derivatives and compositions for their use as inhibitors of HIV protease |
IL111785A0 (en) * | 1993-12-03 | 1995-01-24 | Ferring Bv | Dp-iv inhibitors and pharmaceutical compositions containing them |
US5580979A (en) * | 1994-03-15 | 1996-12-03 | Trustees Of Tufts University | Phosphotyrosine peptidomimetics for inhibiting SH2 domain interactions |
US5543396A (en) | 1994-04-28 | 1996-08-06 | Georgia Tech Research Corp. | Proline phosphonate derivatives |
US5614649A (en) | 1994-11-14 | 1997-03-25 | Cephalon, Inc. | Multicatalytic protease inhibitors |
US5834428A (en) * | 1995-04-14 | 1998-11-10 | 1149336 Ontario Inc. | Glucagon-like peptide-2 and its therapeutic use |
MX9709874A (en) | 1995-06-06 | 1998-03-31 | Pfizer | Substituted n-(indole-2-carbonyl-) amides and derivatives as glycogen phosphorylase inhibitors. |
DE19616486C5 (en) | 1996-04-25 | 2016-06-30 | Royalty Pharma Collection Trust | Method for lowering the blood glucose level in mammals |
US5783556A (en) * | 1996-08-13 | 1998-07-21 | Genentech, Inc. | Formulated insulin-containing composition |
TW492957B (en) | 1996-11-07 | 2002-07-01 | Novartis Ag | N-substituted 2-cyanopyrrolidnes |
US6011155A (en) * | 1996-11-07 | 2000-01-04 | Novartis Ag | N-(substituted glycyl)-2-cyanopyrrolidines, pharmaceutical compositions containing them and their use in inhibiting dipeptidyl peptidase-IV |
US5952301A (en) | 1996-12-10 | 1999-09-14 | 1149336 Ontario Inc. | Compositions and methods for enhancing intestinal function |
CA2304622A1 (en) * | 1997-09-25 | 1999-04-01 | Proscript, Inc. | Proteasome inhibitors, ubiquitin pathway inhibitors or agents that interfere with the activation of nf-?b via the ubiquitin proteasome pathway to treat inflammatory and autoimmunediseases |
BR9813233A (en) * | 1997-09-29 | 2000-08-22 | Point Therapeutics Inc | Stimulation of hematopoietic cells in vitro |
JP2002501889A (en) * | 1998-02-02 | 2002-01-22 | トラスティーズ オブ タフツ カレッジ | Methods for regulating glucose metabolism and reagents related thereto |
US6300314B1 (en) * | 1998-05-04 | 2001-10-09 | Point Therapeutics, Inc. | Hematopoietic stimulation |
DK1084129T3 (en) * | 1998-06-05 | 2003-05-19 | Point Therapeutics Inc | Cyclic boroProline Compounds |
US6979697B1 (en) * | 1998-08-21 | 2005-12-27 | Point Therapeutics, Inc. | Regulation of substrate activity |
IL141471A0 (en) | 1998-08-21 | 2002-03-10 | Point Therapeutics Inc | Regulation of substrate activity |
US6890904B1 (en) * | 1999-05-25 | 2005-05-10 | Point Therapeutics, Inc. | Anti-tumor agents |
DE19940130A1 (en) * | 1999-08-24 | 2001-03-01 | Probiodrug Ges Fuer Arzneim | New effectors of Dipeptidyl Peptidase IV for topical use |
AU1916401A (en) | 1999-11-12 | 2001-06-06 | Guilford Pharmaceuticals Inc. | Dipeptidyl peptidase iv inhibitors and methods of making and using dipeptidyl peptidase iv inhibitors |
US6818419B2 (en) | 2000-01-13 | 2004-11-16 | Tularik Inc. | IRAK-4: compositions and methods of use |
TW591031B (en) * | 2000-02-29 | 2004-06-11 | Takeda Chemical Industries Ltd | Thienopyridine derivatives, their production and use |
DE60137216D1 (en) * | 2000-03-31 | 2009-02-12 | Prosidion Ltd | IMPROVING THE ACTIVITY OF THE ISLAND CELLS IN DIABETES MELLITUS AND ITS PREVENTION |
EP1142889A1 (en) * | 2000-04-03 | 2001-10-10 | Pfizer Products Inc. | Pyrazole derivatives as anti-inflammatory/analgesic agents |
GB0010188D0 (en) | 2000-04-26 | 2000-06-14 | Ferring Bv | Inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV |
DE10025464A1 (en) | 2000-05-23 | 2001-12-06 | Inst Medizintechnologie Magdeb | Combined use of enzyme inhibitors for the therapy of autoimmune diseases, in transplants and tumor diseases, as well as combinations of pharmaceutical preparations comprising enzyme inhibitors |
CN100408579C (en) * | 2001-02-24 | 2008-08-06 | 贝林格尔英格海姆法玛两合公司 | Xanthine derivative, production and use thereof as a medicament |
US7727964B2 (en) * | 2001-11-26 | 2010-06-01 | Trustees Of Tufts College | Peptidomimetic inhibitors of post-proline cleaving enzymes |
JP2006506442A (en) * | 2002-07-09 | 2006-02-23 | ポイント セラピューティクス, インコーポレイテッド | Boroproline compound combination therapy |
CN102174102A (en) * | 2003-05-15 | 2011-09-07 | 塔夫茨大学信托人 | Stable analogs of peptide and polypeptide therapeutics |
RU2379315C2 (en) * | 2004-02-23 | 2010-01-20 | Трастиз Оф Тафтс Колледж | Dipeptidyl peptidase iv inhibitors |
US20060063719A1 (en) * | 2004-09-21 | 2006-03-23 | Point Therapeutics, Inc. | Methods for treating diabetes |
DE102012201584B4 (en) | 2012-02-03 | 2021-04-01 | Lear Corporation | Seat track assembly with selectable end stop positions and method for forming a seat track assembly |
-
2002
- 2002-11-26 CA CA002466870A patent/CA2466870A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2002-11-26 JP JP2003546737A patent/JP2005511636A/en active Pending
- 2002-11-26 EP EP14161169.9A patent/EP2769715A3/en not_active Ceased
- 2002-11-26 AU AU2002360453A patent/AU2002360453C1/en not_active Ceased
- 2002-11-26 EP EP02795710A patent/EP1487471A4/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2002-11-26 US US10/496,627 patent/US8410053B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2002-11-26 WO PCT/US2002/038347 patent/WO2003045228A2/en active Search and Examination
-
2010
- 2010-07-30 JP JP2010172410A patent/JP2010248251A/en active Pending
-
2012
- 2012-03-14 US US13/420,121 patent/US20120232004A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2014
- 2014-04-02 JP JP2014076508A patent/JP2014122251A/en active Pending
-
2016
- 2016-04-01 JP JP2016074086A patent/JP2016147895A/en not_active Abandoned
Cited By (33)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
EP2116235A1 (en) | 2005-01-10 | 2009-11-11 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Combination therapy for the treatment of diabetes and conditions related thereto and for the treatment of conditions ameliorated by increasing a blood GLP-1 level |
US7803754B2 (en) | 2005-01-10 | 2010-09-28 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Combination therapy for the treatment of diabetes and conditions related thereto and for the treatment of conditions ameliorated by increasing a blood GLP-1 level |
US7803753B2 (en) | 2005-01-10 | 2010-09-28 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Combination therapy for the treatment of diabetes and conditions related thereto and for the treatment of conditions ameliorated by increasing a blood GLP-1 level |
US8198232B2 (en) | 2005-01-10 | 2012-06-12 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Combination therapy for the treatment of diabetes and conditions related thereto and for the treatment of conditions ameliorated by increasing a blood GLP-1 level |
US8030270B2 (en) | 2005-01-10 | 2011-10-04 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Methods for identifying GLP-1 secretagogues |
US8022034B2 (en) | 2005-01-10 | 2011-09-20 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Combination therapy for the treatment of diabetes and conditions related thereto and for the treatment of conditions ameliorated by increasing a blood GLP-1 level |
US8003597B2 (en) | 2005-01-10 | 2011-08-23 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Combination therapy for the treatment of diabetes and conditions related thereto and for the treatment of conditions ameliorated by increasing a blood GLP-1 level |
EP2253311A2 (en) | 2006-04-11 | 2010-11-24 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Use of GPR119 receptor agonists for increasing bone mass and for treating osteoporosis, as well as combination therapy relating thereto |
US8101626B2 (en) | 2006-04-11 | 2012-01-24 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | GPR119 receptor agonists in methods of increasing bone mass and of treating osteoporosis and other conditions characterized by low bone mass, and combination therapy relating thereto |
US8017574B2 (en) | 2006-04-11 | 2011-09-13 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Methods of preparing pharmaceutical compositions comprising GPR119 agonists having the effect of glucose-dependent insulinotropic peptide secretagogues |
US8580526B2 (en) | 2006-04-11 | 2013-11-12 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Methods of using GPR119 receptor to identify compounds which stimulate glucose-dependent insulinotropic peptide secretion |
US8026074B2 (en) | 2006-04-11 | 2011-09-27 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Methods of using GPR119 to identify compounds useful for increasing bone mass in an individual |
US8026212B2 (en) | 2006-04-11 | 2011-09-27 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Methods of preparing pharmaceutical compositions comprising GPR119 agonists having the effect of glucose-dependent insulinotropic peptide secretatgogues |
US7833730B2 (en) | 2006-04-11 | 2010-11-16 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Methods of using GPR119 to identify compounds useful for increasing bone mass in an individual |
US7816364B2 (en) | 2006-04-11 | 2010-10-19 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | GRP119 receptor agonists in methods of increasing bone mass and of treating osteoporosis and other conditions characterized by low bone mass, and combination therapy relating thereto |
US8486646B2 (en) | 2008-04-07 | 2013-07-16 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Methods of using a G protein-coupled receptor to identify peptide YY (PYY) secretagogues |
US8883714B2 (en) | 2008-04-07 | 2014-11-11 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Pharmaceutical compositions comprising GPR119 agonists which act as peptide YY (PYY) secretagogues |
US7838254B2 (en) | 2008-04-07 | 2010-11-23 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Methods of using GPR119 to identify peptide YY (PYY) secretagogues and compounds useful in the treatment of conditions modulated by PYY |
WO2011005929A1 (en) | 2009-07-09 | 2011-01-13 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Piperidine derivative and its use for the treatment of diabets and obesity |
WO2011127051A1 (en) | 2010-04-06 | 2011-10-13 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
EP3323818A1 (en) | 2010-09-22 | 2018-05-23 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
WO2012040279A1 (en) | 2010-09-22 | 2012-03-29 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
WO2012135570A1 (en) | 2011-04-01 | 2012-10-04 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
WO2012145361A1 (en) | 2011-04-19 | 2012-10-26 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
WO2012145604A1 (en) | 2011-04-22 | 2012-10-26 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
WO2012145603A1 (en) | 2011-04-22 | 2012-10-26 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
WO2012170702A1 (en) | 2011-06-08 | 2012-12-13 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
WO2013055910A1 (en) | 2011-10-12 | 2013-04-18 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
WO2014074668A1 (en) | 2012-11-08 | 2014-05-15 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of gpr119 and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
US10555929B2 (en) | 2015-03-09 | 2020-02-11 | Coherus Biosciences, Inc. | Methods for the treatment of nonalcoholic fatty liver disease and/or lipodystrophy |
US10772865B2 (en) | 2015-03-09 | 2020-09-15 | Coherus Biosciences, Inc. | Methods for the treatment of nonalcoholic fatty liver disease and/or lipodystrophy |
US11400072B2 (en) | 2015-03-09 | 2022-08-02 | Coherus Biosciences, Inc. | Methods for the treatment of nonalcoholic fatty liver disease and/or lipodystrophy |
US11253508B2 (en) | 2017-04-03 | 2022-02-22 | Coherus Biosciences, Inc. | PPARy agonist for treatment of progressive supranuclear palsy |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
US8410053B2 (en) | 2013-04-02 |
JP2014122251A (en) | 2014-07-03 |
JP2016147895A (en) | 2016-08-18 |
EP2769715A2 (en) | 2014-08-27 |
US20050070459A1 (en) | 2005-03-31 |
EP1487471A2 (en) | 2004-12-22 |
JP2005511636A (en) | 2005-04-28 |
US20120232004A1 (en) | 2012-09-13 |
AU2002360453A1 (en) | 2003-06-10 |
AU2002360453B2 (en) | 2008-07-10 |
WO2003045228A2 (en) | 2003-06-05 |
AU2002360453C1 (en) | 2009-06-18 |
EP1487471A4 (en) | 2010-03-10 |
WO2003045228A9 (en) | 2004-09-16 |
WO2003045228A3 (en) | 2004-10-21 |
EP2769715A3 (en) | 2014-09-17 |
JP2010248251A (en) | 2010-11-04 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
AU2002360453C1 (en) | Methods for treating autoimmune disorders, and reagents related thereto | |
US9044424B2 (en) | Methods of regulating glucose metabolism, and reagents related thereto | |
AU2007202745B2 (en) | Method of regulating glucose metabolism, and reagents related thereto | |
AU2016222497A1 (en) | Method of regulating glucose metabolism, and reagents related thereto | |
AU2014271353A1 (en) | Method of regulating glucose metabolism, and reagents related thereto |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
EEER | Examination request | ||
FZDE | Discontinued |
Effective date: 20180220 |